Seat Toledo Edition 02.06 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Seat Toledo Edition 02.06 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF
auto emocin
T O L E D O
m an
ue ld
in st
ru ct
io ns
SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com- prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehculo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la tcnica. Por esta razn, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basndose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente Manual.
Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la informacin en el momento de la realizacin de la impresin. Salvo error u omisin, la informacin recogida en el presente manual es vlida en la fecha de cierre de su edicin.
No est permitida la reimpresin, la reproduccin o la traduccin, total o parcial, sin la autorizacin escrita de SEAT.
SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos segn la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificacin.
Este papel est fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.
SEAT S.A. - Reimpresin: 15.04.06
Interior Manual TOLEDO 02.06 20/4/06 18:42 Pgina 1
Foreword This owner's manual and the corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with your vehicle.
Also, the regular care and maintenance and correct handling of the vehicle will contribute to preserve its value.
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modifications and parts exchange.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner as this should be kept with the vehicle.
Contents 3
Contents
The structure of this manual . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . . Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital display in the instrument panel . . . . . . . Instrument panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel lighting controls . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . . Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox* Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic stabilisation program (ESP)* . . . . . . .
Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . . . Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
6
7
7
7 10 16 17
19
19 21 24 28
30
30 34 37 41 44
46
46 48 50
55
55
55 56 59 65 72
84
84 84 88 92
93
93 99
100 102 104 106 108
111
111 117 119 120 124
127
127 128 130 131 133
142 144 145
148
148 150 153 157
158
158 159 160 161 164 165 169 171 172
177
177
177
178 179
181
181 182 183
Contents4
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving economically and with respect for the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care of the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile telephones and two-way radios . . . . . . . Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools, spare wheel and tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System) . . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .
What you should be aware of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How are the figures measured? . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petrol engine 1.4 litre 63 kW (86 bhp) . . . . . . . Petrol engine 1.6 litre 75 kW (102 bhp) . . . . . . Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 bhp) . . . . . Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 hp). Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 hp). Manual Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 hp). Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel engine 1.9 litre TDI 77 kW (105 bhp) . . . Diesel engine 2.0 litre 103 kW (140 bhp). Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel engine 2.0 litre 103 kW (140 bhp). Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel engine 2.0 litre 100 kW (136 bhp). Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel engine 2.0 litre 100 kW (136 bhp). Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . . . . . . . Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
188
190
190 191 196
199
199 199 200 200 201
203
203 204 205 206 209 213 216 219 221 223
229
229 231 237 239 247 257 260
263
263
263 265 266 266
268
268 269 270 272
273 275
276 278
280
281
284
285 287 289
291
The structure of this manual 5
The structure of this manual Before reading this manual it must be understood This manual describes the vehicle equipment at the time of publication. Some of the equipment described here will not be available until a later date, or is available only in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the TOLEDO, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the tech- nical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive adver- tising.
Illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the equip- ment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is fitted as standard only in deter- mined model versions, are supplied as optional only for some versions or model year, or are only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with . Even if the copyright symbol does not appear this does not mean that the mark is not copyrighted.
The section is continued on the following page.
Indicates the end of a section.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environ- ment.
Note Texts with this symbol contain additional information of a more general nature. In certain countries there may be different units of measurement than the ones used in this manual. For example, miles and gallons may be used instead of kilometres and litres.
Content6
Content This manual is structured to give you the information you need as quickly and clearly as possible. The contents of this Manual are grouped into relatively short sections making up chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large parts which are:
1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of the vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, how to create a suitable climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Tips and Maintenance Advice relating to driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle and certain problems which you may solve yourself.
4. Technical Data Figures, data, dimensions and measurements (for example fuel consump- tion) of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help you to rapidly find the information you require.
Safe driving 7
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, advice, suggestions and warnings that should be read and followed in the interest of your own safety and the safety of your passengers.
WARNING
This manual contains important information concerning the handling of the vehicle by the driver and the passenger. The other booklets in the vehicle wallet also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is a part of the occupant protection system and can reduce the risk of injury during an accident.
Never gamble with your safety and the safety of your passengers. In the event of an accident, the safety equipment could reduce the risk of injury. The following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
optimised three-point seat belts,
belt tension limiter for the front and rear seats,
belt tension devices for the front seats,
belt height adjustment for the front seats,
front airbags,
side airbags in the front seat backrests,
curtain airbags,
crash-active front head restraints*,
ISOFIX anchor points for ISOFIX child seats on the outer seats in the second row,
height-adjustable head restraints,
head restraints with in-use position and non-use position,
adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your passengers with the best possible protection in accident situations. But this safety equipment cannot help you or your passengers if you or your
Safe driving8
passengers assume an incorrect sitting position or do not properly adjust or use this equipment.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important, how it protects you, what you have to observe when using it and how you and your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your passengers should observe in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before every trip
The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the operational worthiness of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:
Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw- lessly.
Check tyre pressure.
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.
Securely restrain all parcels page 17.
Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly for your size.
Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the head restraints in the in-use position page 14.
Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to their height.
Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly applied seat belts page 46.
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sitting position page 10.
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly
page 19.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and the personal behaviour of all occupants.
As driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers. When your concentration or driving safety is affected, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road , for this reason:
Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic around you, e.g. by passengers or telephone conversations.
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica- tion, alcohol, drugs).
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
Safe driving 9
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions.
When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are under pres- sure of time.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.
Safe driving10
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for safe and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driver:
Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest
fig. 1.
Move the driver's seat forwards or backwards so that you are able to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled .
Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head fig. 2.
Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel
Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver
Safe driving 11
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Fasten your seat belt correctly page 19.
Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat page 127.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the hub of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position for front passenger
The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest possible protection in the event that it is triggered.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front passenger:
Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible .
Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests completely against it.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head page 13.
Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the front passenger seat.
Fasten your seat belt correctly page 19.
It is possible to deactivate the passenger airbag in exceptional circum- stances page 25.
For detailed information on how to adjust the front passenger's seat, see page 130.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe injuries.
Safe driving12
Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in the event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must observe the following:
Adjust the headrest to the correct position page 14.
Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the rear seat.
Fasten your seat belt correctly page 19.
Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children in the vehicle page 46.
WARNING
If the passengers on the rear seat are not sitting properly, they could sustain severe injuries.
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when backrests are in an upright position and the passengers are wearing their seat belts properly. If passengers on the rear seat are not sitting in an upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web increases.
WARNING (continued)
Safe driving 13
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level
fig. 3 and fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints page 127
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu- pant's size.
Headrests in use*
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their seats during a rear end collision. The resulting body pressure on the backrest activates the crash-active head restraint* on the front seat, which moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the same time. This movement reduces the distance between the occupant's head and the head rest, thus reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain trauma.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side
Safe driving14
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu- pant's size.
Note The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by falling back into the seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi- ately and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations
Fig. 5 Head restraints in correct position
Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label
Safe driving 15
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Rear outer seat head restraints
The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.
Two positions for use page 14, fig. 5. In these positions, the head restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along with the rear seat belts.
And one position for non-use.
To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Centre rear head restraint
The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window page 14, fig. 6.
Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.
Injury risk in case of an accident!
Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 128.
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to occupants.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect belt web position. As the driver, you are responsible for all vehicle occupants, especially children.
Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while travelling .
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
Never stand in the vehicle,
never stand on the seats,
never kneel on the seats,
never tilt your backrest far to the rear,
never lean against the dash panel,
never lie on the rear bench,
never sit on the front edge of a seat,
never sit sideways,
never lean out of a window,
never put your feet out of a window,
never put your feet on the dash panel,
never put your feet on the surface of a seat,
Safe driving16
never travel in a foot well,
never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,
never carry any person in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags deploy, striking an occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip
page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation and freedom of movement of all pedals must never be impaired by objects or floor mats.
Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi- tions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely fastened in the foot well.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be free to move further than normal in order to bring the vehicle to a stop.
Wear suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feel for the pedals.
WARNING
Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving.
Never place objects in the driver foot well. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened in the foot well and do not impair operation of the pedals.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali- fied dealership.
WARNING
If the pedals are obstructed, you could cause an accident. Risk of serious injuries.
Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
Safe driving 17
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.
Stowing luggage
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the luggage compartment.
Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart- ment.
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings page 18.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment can cause serious injuries.
Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on the fastening rings.
Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects.
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring vehicle occupants. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into missiles. Risk of fatal injury.
Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- dent. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly, to avoid accidents.
Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- acteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment closing the door behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal risk.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.
Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every passenger must be properly belted in page 19.
Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart- ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Safe driving18
Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially available.
Fastening rings
There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment that can be used to secure luggage and other objects.
Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the luggage compartment on page 17.
Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object. The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
For example: an object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corresponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the inju- ries which might be sustained if this projectile strikes an occupant as it flies through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward, always use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening rings.
Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.
WARNING (continued)
Seat belts 19
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seat belts
Introduction
Before driving: Secure your seatbelt!
Properly worn seat belts can save lives!
In this chapter you will learn why seat belts are so important, how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
Read and observe all the information as well as the warnings in this chapter.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- ries increases.
Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in the event of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. Therefore, you and your passen- gers should always wear the seat belts properly as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Pregnant women or persons with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other occupants, these persons can also sustain severe injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
WARNING
Never transport more people than there are seats available in the vehicle.
Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The warning lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten the seat belt.
Before you drive:
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before driving off.
Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off.
Protect your children with child restraint systems appropriate for the size and age of the children.
Seat belts20
The warning lamp in the combi-instrument lights up if the driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched on. In addition, an acoustic signal is given for a few seconds and a text is displayed on the combi-instru- ment asking you to fasten your seat belt1).
The warning lamp* does not go out until the driver seat belt is fastened while the ignition is switched on.
1) Depending on the model version
Seat belts 21
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Why wear seat belts?
Frontal collisions and the laws of physics
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic energy is generated.
The laws of physics applied to a frontal collision may be easily explained: When a vehicle is in motion fig. 7 a stored energy called kinetic energy is created in the vehicle as well as in the vehicle occupants.
The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the vehicle and passengers. The higher the speed and the greater the weight, the more energy there is to be released in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h to 50 km/h, for example, the kinetic energy increases by a factor of four.
Because the passengers in our example are not restrained by seat belts, the entire amount of kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact
fig. 8.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to 50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli- sion can easily exceed one tonne (1,000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a frontal collision they will continue to move forward at the speed their vehicle
Fig. 7 Vehicle about to collide with a wall: the occupants are not wearing seatbelts
Fig. 8 The vehicle collides with the wall: the occupants are not wearing seatbelts
Seat belts22
was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal accidents, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
Many people believe that the occupants can protect them- selves with their hands in a minor collision, this is false.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel, dashboard, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
fig. 9.
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. When deployed, airbags provide only additional protection. All occupants (including the driver) must be wearing seat belts properly during the trip. This will reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of an accident regardless of whether an airbag is fitted for the seat.
Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear passengers who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front occupants fig. 10.
Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.
Fig. 10 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.
Seat belts 23
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seat belts protect
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi- tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident. Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of being thrown from the car.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front crumple zones and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to absorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the forces acting on the occupants and consequently the risk of injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts reduce substantially the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown properly worn seat belts to be an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the airbag trigger threshold in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that your passengers have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety notes on using seat belts
If seat belts are used correctly, they can reduce the risk of injury in an accident.
Always wear the seat belt as described in this booklet.
Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- ries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly.
Fig. 11 Always wear the seat belt correctly: it is held during sudden braking
Seat belts24
Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. That applies also to your front and rear passengers danger of injury!
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi- tioned correctly.
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.
The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
Seat belts that have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly page 198.
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked into position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt
Seat belts 25
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly across your chest and lap.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
page 24, fig. 12.
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension devices page 28.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.
Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 46.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they are properly positioned.
Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front
Fig. 14 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side
Seat belts26
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder region:
belt height adjustment for the front seats.
front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso
page 25, fig. 13.
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 25, fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Read and observe the warnings page 23.
Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly
The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnancy.
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web is properly positioned page 25.
Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly page 10.
Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest and as low as possible over the pelvis fig. 15.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the corresponding seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
.
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.
Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy
Seat belts 27
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
Read and observe the warnings page 23.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a standstill.
Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 16. The latch plate is released and springs out .
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim is not damaged.
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Adjusting the seat belt height
Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the position of the seat belt at the shoulder.
The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can be used to adjust the proper belt position at the shoulder.
Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle
Fig. 17 Location of the belt height adjuster
Seat belts28
Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this position page 27, fig. 17.
Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted the seat belt page 25.
After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while travelling .
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them during the trip.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 23.
Belt tension devices
Function of the belt tension device
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats are retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occupants are equipped with belt tension devices. Sensors will only trigger the belt tension devices during severe head-on, lateral and rear collisions, and only if the seat belt is actually being worn. This retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu- pants.
The belt tension device can be triggered only once.
The belt tension devices will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal, side or rear collision, if the vehicle overturns, or in situations where no large forces act on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.
Note If the belt tension devices are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you.
Service and disposal of belt tension devices
The belt tension devices are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension devices or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat
Seat belts 29
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci- dent, the belt tension devices function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula- tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts.
The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.
Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.
Airbag system30
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure the following before you drive:
Always wear the seat belt properly page 19.
Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly page 10.
Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.
Adjust the head restraint seat correctly page 13.
Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your vehicle page 46.
The airbag deploys in fractions of a second and with a high velocity. If you have assumed an incorrect seating position at that moment, you could sustain critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all occupants maintain a correct sitting position while travelling.
Braking heavily the moment before an accident may cause an occupant not wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag.
In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries upon the occupant. This applies particularly to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig- gered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors involved in the triggering of an airbag are: the type of accident, the collision angle and the vehicle speed.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler- ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle following an accident, for whatever reason, are not an indication as to why the airbags were triggered.
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- tion can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
All occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. You should always transport all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat. Never transport children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the seat belt properly page 19.
Airbag system 31
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Always properly adjust the front seats.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if you transport the child in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may result.
Therefore we urgently recommend that you transport children on the rear seats. That is the safest place in the vehicle for children. Alternatively, the front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch
page 44. When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size of each child page 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.
An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and hurl it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest.
If, under special circumstances, it should be necessary to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential that you observe the following safety measures:
Disable the front passenger airbag page 44, Deactivating airbags*.
The child seat must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.
Follow the installation instructions of the child seat manufacturer and absolutely observe the warnings page 46, Child safety.
Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger seat all the way to the rear so that the greatest possible distance to the front passenger airbag is ensured.
Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being pushed completely back.
The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright position.
Warning lamp for airbag and belt tension device system
This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension device system.
The warning lamp monitors all airbags and belt tension devices in the vehicle, including control units and wiring connections.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Airbag system32
Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system
The functionality of the airbag and belt tension device system is constantly monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel* shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp :
does not come on when the ignition is switched on,
does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the display of the combi-instrument for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the system immediately.
If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off if there is no fault.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function.
If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that, in the event of an acci- dent, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.
Repair, care and disposal of the airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle. If you work on the airbag system or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates incorrectly or does not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the airbag are scrapped. The specialist workshops and the Vehicle disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.
WARNING
If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.
Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the soft plastic surface of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dashboard, and do not obstruct or modify them in any way.
It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele- phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry cloth or one moistened with water. Never clean the dash panel and surface of the airbag module with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag system.
Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should be performed only by a qualified workshop. Qualified workshops have the necessary tools, repair information and qualified personnel.
Airbag system 33
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
We urgently recommend that you go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system.
Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system34
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel fig. 18 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel fig. 19. Airbags are identified by the text AIRBAG.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision page 37, Safety notes on front airbag system.
In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the airbags can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times - not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety
page 19, Introduction.
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front passenger,
a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag warning lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp
does not come on when the ignition is switched on page 31,
does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering wheel
Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel
Airbag system 35
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
if the ignition is switched off,
during a minor frontal collision,
during a minor side collision,
during a rear-end collision,
or if the vehicle rolls.
WARNING
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a frontal collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of front airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury.
The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig- gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and deploy in front of the driver and front passenger fig. 20. The fully deployed airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel- lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. Once the impact has been absorbed, the airbag deflates sufficiently for the front occupants to see forward.
Fig. 20 Inflated front airbags
Airbag system36
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The function of the airbag covers if the airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver and front passenger airbags deploy fig. 21. The airbag covers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fig. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the airbags are trig- gered
Airbag system 37
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Safety notes on front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.
If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.
Occupants sitting in the front of the vehicle must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The side airbags are located in the driver seat and front passenger seat back- rests fig. 22. The rear side airbags are fitted in the rear wheel housing lining. The locations are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper region of the backrests and on the rear wheel housing lining.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat occupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision page 40, Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system.
In a side collision the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position
Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver seat
Airbag system38
where the side airbags can provide maximum protection in case of a side-on impact.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times - not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 19, Introduction.
The side airbag system will not be triggered
if the ignition is switched off,
during a minor side collision,
during a minor frontal collision,
during a minor rear-end collision,
or if the vehicle rolls.
The main parts of the airbag system are
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
the front side airbags on the front seat backs and the rear side airbags located in the rear wheel housing lining,
a warning lamp in the instrument panel page 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag warning lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
WARNING
In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.
Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been correctly closed.
Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.
Any work carried out to the doors should be made in a qualified author- ised workshop.
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a side collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 39
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Function of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle fig. 23.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig- gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel- lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Fig. 23 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle
Airbag system40
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury should the side airbag system be triggered in an accident.
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case the side airbags would not be triggered.
Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 199, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.
Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose them- selves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This is particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have critical consequences including serious injury or death page 46, Child safety.
Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way, this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 41
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors fig. 24 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu- pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times - not only
because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 19, Introduction.
The main parts of the curtain airbag system are:
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front passenger and passengers on the rear seats,
a warning lamp in the instrument panel page 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically.
The curtain airbag system will not be triggered
if the ignition is switched off,
Fig. 24 Location of left curtain airbag
Airbag system42
during a frontal collision,
during a rear-end collision,
if the vehicle rolls,
or during a minor frontal collision.
WARNING
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in a side collision.
During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle fig. 25.
In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig- gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the process, the curtain bag covers the side windows and door pillars.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel- lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
For safety reasons, the head air bag must be disconnected in those vehicles fitted with a passenger compartment separation screen. See an Authorised Service Centre to make this adjustment.
Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags
Airbag system 43
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 199, Accessories, parts replacement and modifica- tions.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. When using the coat hooks, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way, this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system44
Deactivating airbags*
Disabling front passenger airbag
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, this means that only the frontal airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain functional.
Disabling front passenger airbag
Switch off ignition.
Turn the ignition switch in the key operated switch in the glove box to the position OFF fig. 26.
Check that the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF in the instrument panel fig. 27 remains lit when the ignition is switched on.
Enabling front passenger airbag
Switch off ignition.
Turn the ignition switch in the key-operated switch in the glove box to the position ON fig. 26.
Fig. 26 In the glove compartment: there is key switch for disabling and enabling the airbags on the front passenger side
Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console
Airbag system 45
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Check that the warning lamp in the instrument panel does page 44, fig. 27 not light when the ignition is switched on
.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.
You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. page 46, Child safety.
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.
As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.
Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.
It is not certain whether the front passenger airbag will deploy during an accident! Inform your passengers of this.
When using the ignition key to activate / deactivate the passenger front airbag, only the passenger front airbag will be activated / deactivated. The side airbag and head airbag on the passenger side will remain active.
WARNING (continued)
Child safety46
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear seat than on the front passenger seat.
We recommend that children under 12 years of age be transported on the rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and weight. For safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in the centre of the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.
The physical principles involved and the forces acting in a collision apply to children just as much as adults page 21, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc- tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces- sories Program including systems for all ages made by Peke2).
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require- ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe
page 46.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in your vehicle.
Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats page 48.
Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child seat.
When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least every two hours.
WARNING
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled page 44, Deactivating 2) Not for all countries
Child safety 47
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!
Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and other occupants.
If children assume an improper sitting position when the car is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly the case if the child is trav- elling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have consequences including serious injury or death.
A suitable child seat can protect your child!
Never leave a child unsupervised in a child seat or alone in the vehicle.
Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child restraint system, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision or sudden braking manoeuvres.
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web is properly positioned page 24, Seat belts.
Only one child may occupy a child seat page 48.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Child safety48
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable for the child.
The ECE-R 44 standard applies to child seats. ECE-R means: Economic Commission of Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0+: up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can help to protect your child.
Group 0: For babies from about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration fig. 28.
Group 0+: For babies from about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require- ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Fig. 28 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
Child safety 49
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can help to protect your child.
Child seats using the ISOFIX and Toptether system (or even the anti-rota- tion system) or seats in which the child faces the rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require- ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Group 2 and 3 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can help to protect your child.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require- ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best protected by group 2 child seats in conjunction with properly adjusted seat belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5 metres tall are best protected by seat cushions with head restraints in conjunction with properly worn seat belts fig. 30.
Fig. 29 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
Fig. 30 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.
Child safety50
WARNING
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the torso. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across
the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 24, Seat belts.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the following ways:
Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
Child seats for the groups 0, 0+ and 1 using the ISOFIX and Toptether systems or the antirotation system may be secured without using the adult seatbelt and using the ISOFIX and Toptether anchors or the antirotation mechanism/brackets page 51.
U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult seat belt.
*: Move the passenger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible and always deactivate the airbag.
L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX and Toptether anchors or antirotation mechanism/bracket.
WARNING (continued)
Weight class Weight Seat locations
Front passenger Rear outer Rear centre
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U
Child safety 51
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if a child must, under exceptional circumstances, travel in the front passenger seat, the passenger airbag must be deactivated page 44, Deactivating airbags* and the seat put into the highest position where possible.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Securing the child seat using the ISOFIX and Toptether system or the antirotation mechanism/system.
The child seat with ISOFIX system can be secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear outer seats using the system
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the manufacturer's instructions.
Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.
Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the child seat can be heard to engage securely. If the child seat is fitted with Toptether anchoring, connect it to the corre- sponding ring. If the child seat is fitted with any other antirota- tion system, follow the manufacturer instructions carefully.
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings
Child safety52
Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat frame and in others they are secured to the rear floor. The ISOFIX rings can be accessed between the seat back and the seat cushion. The Toptether rings are located in the rear space in the back. They are often located on the rear of the seat backs.
Child seats with ISOFIX and Toptether mountings are available from the Authorised Service Centres.
WARNING
The retaining rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX and Toptether systems.
Never secure child seats that do not have the ISOFIX or Toptether system, retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!
Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly using the ISOFIX and Toptether anchors.
53
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
54
Fig. 32 Instrument panel
Cockpit 55
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the instrument panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air vent
Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . . .
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* .
Instrument panel:
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thumb wheel for left seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for
Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioner* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio
Thumb wheel for right seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indication lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . .
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove compartment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake
Pedals
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button for opening and closing the front windows . . . . . . . . .
Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . . .
Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain models/model years or are optional extras.
A1
A2 111
A3
A4 113
A5 113
A6 115
A7
56
59
72
A8
30
A9
120, 61
A10 131
A11
148
150
153
A12
A13 131
A14 44
A15 30
A16 133
A17 165
A18 138
A19
A20
A21 160
A22 206
A23 106
A24 106
A25 106
Cockpit56
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Description of the instrument panel: instrument panel
Fuel gauge page 57
Multi-function display
Engine coolant temperature gauge page 57
Rev counter page 58
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button page 58
Speedometer
Fig. 33 Description of the instrument panel: instrument panel
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Cockpit 57
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Instrument panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone fig. 34 (arrow), the warning lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears in the instrument panel display 3) PLEASE REFUEL*
Engine coolant temperature display
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads fig. 35.
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions, the needle should be in the middle section of the scale. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard, especially at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern as long as the warning lamp does not light up and no warning* text appears in the combi-instrument display.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* page 72, fig. 47 will light up if the needle is in the warning zone. The following warning appears in the instrument panel display
3) Depending on the model version
Fig. 34 Instrument panel: fuel gauge Fig. 35 Instrument panel:
engine coolant tempera- ture
AA
AB
AC
A2
Cockpit58
4) . Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level page 213 .
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always bear in mind the safety warnings. page 206
Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
The start of the red zone on the dial page 56, fig. 33 indicates the maximum engine speed which may be used briefly when the engine is warm and after it has been run in properly. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of engine damage.
For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise engine noise.
Setting the digital clock*
The digital clock is located in the instrument panel display.
Turn the setting knob page 56, fig. 33 anti-clockwise to the stop to set the hour. If the knob is turned briefly anti-clock- wise the clock will advance one hour further.
Turn the setting knob clockwise to the limit stop to set the minutes. If the knob is turned briefly clockwise the clock will advance one minute further.
4) Depending on the model version
A4
A5
Cockpit 59
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Digital display in the instrument panel
Display (without warning or information texts)
The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.
Digital clock display page 58
Distance display or service interval display page 60
Selector lever position display for the automatic gearbox*.
Display for the gears in Tiptronic mode (automatic gearbox)*. The selected gear appears in the display field with a light background
fig. 37 Fig. 36 Description of the instrument panel: multi- indicator screen
Fig. 37 Description of the instrument panel: screen with Tiptronic gear indi- cator
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
Cockpit60
Displayed categories
The display in the instrument panel shows the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.
Indication lamps: Indication lamps
Clock: Setting the time. In some vehicles the ambient temperature is displayed to the right of the clock.
There are optional and automatic displays in this field.
- Optional indications: e.g. Multi-function display (MFD) and ambient temperature display
- Automatic indications: information and warning messages: Informa- tion and warning messages on the screen
- The screen displays menus with various information that may be used to make adjustments: Instrument panel menu:
Distance display or adjustable service interval display: Distance display or adjustable service interval display
Selector lever position display for the automatic gearbox. The actual position of the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) is highlighted.
Mileage display or Service Interval Display
Distance display
The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by the reset button page 56, fig. 33 .
Service interval display
A Service pre-warning will appear in the mileage displays if a service is due soon. A spanner symbol appears and the display km with the distance that can be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will change after approximately 10 seconds. A clock symbol appears and the number of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display5) : SERV. IN ... KM OR ... DAYS. The service message will disappear approxi- mately 20 seconds after the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. The normal display can be resumed by pressing the reset button on the trip counter or by pressing the rocker switch of the MFI page 61, fig. 39 .
With the ignition switched on, you can call up the current service message by pressing the trip counter reset knob for 2 seconds.
Fig. 38 Digital display in the instrument panel
A1
A1
A2
5) Depending on the model version
A3
A4
A5
AB
Cockpit 61
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day information.
Display with multi-function display (MFD)*
The multi-function display (MFD) shows you diverse journey and consumption data.
The multi-function system has two automatic memories: 1 - Actual memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
Selecting memory
With the ignition switched on, briefly press the button fig. 39 on the windscreen wiper lever to move between the two
memories.
Resetting the memory
Select the memory that you would like to reset.
Press and hold button on the windscreen wiper lever for at least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will be added to
Fig. 39 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: switch A and rocker switch B
Fig. 40 Digital display in the instrument panel: average fuel consumption indicator
AA
AA
Cockpit62
the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi- vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes travel time, 9999 miles distance trav- elled and 999 litres of fuel consumed. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is reached.
Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)*
You can switch between the following displays in the multi-function display (MFD) by operating the rocker switch fig. 41 on the windscreen wiper lever.
Memory displays
Journey duration
Speed warning
Average speed
Distance
Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time that has elapsed since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes. The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Fig. 41 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: switch A and rocker switch B
Fig. 42 Digital display in the instrument panel: average fuel consumption indicator.
AB
Cockpit 63
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required speed, enter the speed indicator mode and press the button (Reset), the display remembers the indicated speed. If the indicated speed is exceeded, a warning text is displayed on the screen 6) and a warning signal sounds.
This may be deactivated by pressing the button (Reset).
The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.
mph - Average speed
The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds whilst the vehicle is in motion.
Miles - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 9999 miles. The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Miles - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi- tions as a reference.
litre/100km - Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption will be shown page 62, fig. 42 after a distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds whilst the vehicle is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
ltr/100km or ltr/hr - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump- tion page 188.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin extends from -45 C to +58 C. At temperatures lower than +4 C, an ice crystal symbol is displayed and a warning sounds if the vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the exterior temperature rises above +4 C or 6C if it was already lit.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the snowflake symbol is not shown. You should, for this reason, not rely exclusively on this display - Risk of accident!
Note When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera- ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature as a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Warning or information text in the display
Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and warning/information reports.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni- tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-
6) Depending on the model version, the message on the screen may vary and may be represented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message.
AA
AA
AB
Cockpit64
cated by symbols with warnings and information texts in the display. An audible warning is given in certain cases.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols (priority 2).
Information text
In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
Note In the case of screens without warning or information texts, faults are indi- cated exclusively by the warning lamps.
Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes- sional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning report.
Examples of priority 1 warning reports (red) 7)
Brake system symbol with warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Coolant symbol with the warning text STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MANUAL
Warning reports, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.
If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time, the symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning reports will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning reports have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yellow):8)
Fuel symbol with the information text PLEASE REFUEL
Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank page 216
Electronic immobiliser symbol with the information text SAFE. A valid key was not used, for this reason the vehicle may not start
7) Depending on the model version 8) Depending on the model version
Cockpit 65
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Instrument panel menus
Main menu
The menu enables access to the different display functions.
Open main menu
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the eject button for at least 2 seconds. It may be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is displayed.
Select a menu from the main menu
To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between two horizontal lines.
Press button to select the entry.
Example of menu use: Example of menu use
Fig. 43 Windscreen washer lever: button A to confirm the menu option and rocker switch B to change the menu
Fig. 44 Digital display in the instrument panel: Main menu
AB
AA
Cockpit66
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed.
Main menu Function
Multi-function display Changing to the multi-function indicator (MFD): Multi-function display (MFD)
Audio The current station will be shown when the radio is switched on.
Navigation This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a navigation system. The navigation system must be switched on. When the destination guide is activated, the turning arrows and proximity bars are displayed. The display is similar to that of the Navigation system. If the destination guide is not activated, the direction of travel (compass) and the name of the street along which you are driving are shown.
Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a telephone mounted by the manufacturer: Telephone installation
Vehicle condition This menu shows warning or information texts: Vehicle status menu This option flashes when one of these texts have been activated.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when using winter tyres, units, language, independent heating, the Light and visibility menu and the Convenience menu to be reset.
Display off The display is switched off. It comes on again on entering the main menu or when a warning, breakdown or service message appears. The main menu will be shown in the display for approximately 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on. The display will then switch off again.
Cockpit 67
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Example of menu use
All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according to the following procedure.
The setting of a speed warning will be used as an example of how to use the menus. This is a good idea if you are, for example, using winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
1. Open the main menu
Switch on the ignition.
Hold down button for two seconds to return to main menu from other menu. It may be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is displayed.
2. Open the main menu Configuration
To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between two lines and there will also be a triangle on the right.
Select menu Configuration.
Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura- tion menu is opened.
3. Open the main menu Winter tyres
Select option Winter tyres using the rocker switch.
Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.
4. Program a speed limit warning
Use the rocker switch to select the menu entry + 10 km/h or -10 km/h and press the button to either increase or decrease the set speed.
Fig. 45 Windscreen washer lever: button A to confirm the menu option and rocker switch B to change the menu
Fig. 46 Digital display in the instrument panel: winter tyres indicator
AB
AA
AA
Cockpit68
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
Use the rocker switch to select the menu point On/ Off and press the button to switch the speed warning either on or off. If the speed warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---
6. To close the menu Winter tyres
In the menu select Back.
The function Winter tyres sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the vehicle reaches the set speed.
Example menu Winter tyres
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed.
On the display Winter tyres
Function Name of menu displayed
X km/h The current set speed is displayed
or --- or dashes will be shown if the function is deactivated.
On / Off If the function is activated or deactivated
+10 km/h The set value increases by 10 km/h
-10 km/h The set value decreases by 10 km/h
Back The menu Winter tyres is closed and the last displayed menu is shown.
Cockpit 69
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warning or information texts
Open Vehicle Condition menu
Select an option Vehicle status from the main menu: Main menu and press the button on the windscreen washer lever.
Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: Information and warning messages on the display automatically disappear from the screen after a given time and are stored in the Vehicle status memory.
The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there are no messages, ok appears on the display. If there are several messages, each one is shown for four seconds.
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle functions.
Open Configuration menu
In the menu select Configuration. Main menu and press the button on the windscreen washer lever.
Example of menu use: Examples of menu use.
Configuration Function
Time The hours and minutes of the clock and the navigation system can be changed. Both 12- and 24-hour formats are available and the time may be changed to summer time (an S appears in the upper part of the screen)
Winter tyres The menu allows the setting of a speed at which an optical and acoustic warning will be given by the system. You can use this function, for example, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of your vehicle . See chapter Wheels in owner's manual
Settings: Language The display texts and the navigation system texts can be seen in seven different languages
Units This option allows you to select the units for displaying temperature, fuel consumption values and dis- tances.
Convenience From this menu it is it possible to alter Comfort system settings.
Cockpit70
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed.
Comfort menu
From this menu it is it possible to adjust Comfort system settings.
Open menu Comfort
Choose the option Configuration from main menu and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Choose the option Comfort from main menu and press the button on the windscreen washer lever.
Example of menu use: Example of menu use
Lights & visibility From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting settings. Lights and visibility menu.
Display off Only emergency messages appear
Back This returns to the main menu
AA
AA
Convenience Function
Unlocking Selective unlocking/complete unlocking Auto-locking Auto-unlocking
Audible warning function Activation/deactivation (acoustic warning from the central locking)
Comfort unlocking Deactivation All 1 door
Synchronized adjustment of exterior rear-view mirrors
Synchronized/individual
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
Cockpit 71
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed.
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main menu then press the button on the windscreen washer lever.
Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use: Example of menu use
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed.
AA
AA
Lights & visibility Function
Coming Home/ Leaving Home
The lighting duration may be modified, in steps of 10 seconds, from a minimum of 10 seconds to a maxi- mum of 90 seconds The function may also be deactivated.
Indicator conf. With the convenience mode activated, the indicator will blink at least three times when turned on.
Manufacturer's settings The manufacturer's predefined values for the functions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
Cockpit72
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig. 47 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain models/model years or are optional extras.
Cockpit 73
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information
Fuel level / reserve page 75
Coolant level / coolant temperature page 75
Rear fog light switched on page 76
Turn signals in operation page 76
Trailer turn signals in operation page 76
Main beam switched on page 76
Bulb defective page 76
Cruise control system switched on page 77
Washer fluid level page 77
Parking brake applied or low brake fluid level or fault in brake system
page 77
Engine oil pressure page 78
ABS system fault page 78
Pollen accumulation in the diesel engine particle filter page 79
Alternator fault page 79
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
Cockpit74
WARNING
Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle so that it does not represent a danger.
Fasten seat belts! page 19
Tyre pressure page 80
Engine fault (petrol engine) page 81
Preheating system (diesel engines) If this lights: preheating system activated If this flashes: engine fault
page 81
Airbag or belt tension device system fault or airbag disabled page 28 page 31
Fault in the emission control system page 81
If it flashes: the electronic stabilization program (ESP) is active If it remains lit: The ESP is faulty or deactivated
page 81
Automatic selector lever lock (automatic gearbox) page 82
Electromechanical steering page 82
Brake pad wear indicator page 82
Door open indicator page 82
SAFE Electronic immobiliser page 83
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information
A15
A16
A17
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
WARNING (continued)
Cockpit 75
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compart- ment, you must switch off the engine and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings
page 206.
Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without warning or information texts in the display.
In vehicles with warning or information texts in the display, the appro- priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text will also appear in the display.
Fuel level / reserve
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is down to the reserve level.
This lights when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest opportunity page 203.
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display9): PLEASE REFUEL.
Coolant Level* / temperature
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while three acoustic warning signals are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display10): CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces- sary page 239.
If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Contact an Authorised Service Centre or a qualified workshop.
Coolant level too low
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display11): STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL page 213.
9) Depending on the model version
WARNING (continued)
10) Depending on the model version 11) Depending on the model version
Cockpit76
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity .
WARNING
If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Turn off the engine, turn on the hazard lights and place the warning triangle.
Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings.
page 206
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . Further information page 111.
Turn signals
The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are in oper- ation.
Depending on which turn signal is operated, either the left or right indi- cator lamp flashes. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the hazard warning lights are switched on.
If one turn signal fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice as fast.
Further information on the turn signals page 115.
Trailer turn signals
This warning lamp also flashes when the turn signals are operated while towing a caravan or trailer.
The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle.
The warning lamp will not flash if one of the turn signals on the trailer fails.
Main beam headlights
This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on or when the headlight flasher is operated.
Further information page 115
Bulb defect
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte- rior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting (e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display12): LHS FULL BEAM FAULTY
Cockpit 77
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cruise control system*
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on. Further notes on the cruise control system page 172.
Washer fluid
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity page 216
The following information text is displayed on the instrument panel display*13): TOP UP WASHER FLUID
Brake system* / handbrake
The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied, if the brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake system.
This warning lamp lights up if
If the handbrake is on
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following message will appear in the instrument display 14): HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an sound warning is given.
If the brake fluid level is too low page 219
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display14) : STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
If there is a fault in the brake system
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display14) : BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL
This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system warning lamp.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on page 206, Working in the engine compartment.
If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level page 219, Brake fluid in the reservoir is too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech- nical assistance.
If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
12) Depending on the model version 13) Depending on the model version 14) Depending on the model version
Cockpit78
Engine oil pressure
This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too low, add more engine oil page 209.
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display15): STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
A warning lamp system monitors the ABS.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.
The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way (except that the ABS control function will not function). Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further information on the ABS see the page 177.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp , this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
in the brake system.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on page 206.
If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir page 219, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain technical assistance.
If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor- mation on the EDL page 180
15) Depending on the model version
Cockpit 79
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn out after about 2 seconds.
When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will remain lit.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper- ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information see page 177
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particle filter *
if the symbol lights, soot has built up in the diesel engine particle filter due to continuous short trips. In this case, drive the vehicle at a constant speed of at least 60 km/h (with and engine speed of about 1400 rpm) for about 10 minutes. The increase in temperature generated may burn the accu- mulated soot in the filter.
If the symbol is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialized work- shop to repair the fault.
For more information on the diesel particle filter page 183
WARNING
The diesel engine particle filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Caution Vehicles equipped with a diesel engine particle filter must not be refuelled using biodiesel (RME), given that the fuel system may be damaged.
Alternator
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary because this will drain the battery.
If the indicator flashes the voltage is insufficient for normal vehicle operation.
Cockpit80
Tyre pressure*
The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel revolutions and with this informa- tion, the diameter of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If the diameter of a wheel changes, the tyre monitor indicator lights . The wheel diameter changes when:
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
The tyre structure is damaged.
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.
The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or on extreme slopes).
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
The emergency wheel is fitted.
The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to tyre pressure or changing one or more wheels, the button fig. 48 must be kept pressed while the ignition is on until an acoustic signal is heard.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or heavy load), the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended value for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor system button is pressed the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure monitor indicator lights
If the tyre pressure of one wheel is much lower than the value set by the driver then the indicator lights .
The tyre pressure monitor indicator flashes
If the tyre pressure indicator flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest specialist workshop.
WARNING
When the tyre pressure indicator lights, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status.
The driver is responsible for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.
Under certain circumstances (for example, in a sports situation, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or function incorrectly.
Note If the battery is disconnected, the yellow indicator lights after turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief trip.
Fig. 48 Centre console: tyre monitor system button
Cockpit 81
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Engine management
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out when the engine has started running.
If a fault develops in the electronic engine management system while you are driving, this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
Glow plug system / Engine fault
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are preheating. It flashes if there is an engine fault.
Warning lamp is lit
The warning lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight away.
Warning lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving, the glow plug lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked.
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display16) : EXHAUST SEE WORKSHOP
Warning lamp is lit:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas (e. g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked.
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display*: EXHAUST SEE WORKSHOP.
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
This warning lamp monitors the electronic stabilisation program.
This program includes the ABS, EDL and TCS.
The warning lamp has the following functions:
It will light for about 2 seconds when the ignition is switched on while a test of the function is carried out.
It flashes when the ESP is activated when driving.
It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
16) Depending on the model version
Cockpit82
It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP operates in conjunction with the ABS.
If the ESP warning lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started, this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP. In this case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then on again. If the warning lamp goes out, this means the system is fully functional.
Operating the foot brake
The footbrake must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the positions P or N.
Power steering system*
For vehicles with power steering, the level of steering assistance depends on the vehicle's speed and on the steering angle.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.
If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.
There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, if no assistance is available stop driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the
engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely.
For those vehicles fitted with ESP* the function Recommended steering manoeuvre is included. See page 179.
Brake pad wear indicator*
As the brake pad wear indicator only monitors the front brake pads, it is advis- able to have the rear brake pads inspected at the same time.
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display17): CHECK BRAKE PADS.
WARNING
Have the brake pads inspected immediately by a qualified dealership if the warning display lights up.
Indicator for open doors or tailgate
This indicator lights if one of the doors or the tailgate is open.
The warning light should go off when all the doors are closed correctly.
The system also works when the ignition is switched off. It should go off about 15 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
17) Depending on the model version
Cockpit 83
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Electronic immobiliser* Safe
This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised key is used.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto- matically when the key is inserted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition lock.
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display18) : SAFE. The vehicle cannot be used in that case page 161.
The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.
Note The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT key.
18) Depending on the model version
Steering wheel controls84
Steering wheel controls
Using these instructions
The vehicle includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone and radio / navigation functions without needing to distract the driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction module:
Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering wheel.
Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and the telephone system from the steering wheel.
Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio, CD Audio, CD mp3, CD Changer) and the radio / navigation System, in which case they also control the Navigation system.
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 49 Controls on the steering wheel
Fig. 50 Controls on the steering wheel
Steering wheel controls 85
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD Audio CD mp3a)
a) Only for mp3 compatible radio.*
CDC Radio CD Audio CD mp3a) CDC
Volume up Continue volume up
Volume down Continue volume down
Station search. Higher fre-
quency. Following track
Station search. Higher fre-
quency. Fast forward
Station search. Lower
frequency Previous track
Station search. Lower
frequency Rewind
Cyclic source control FM - AM - CD - CDC - FM...
No specified function
Silence Pause No specified function
Next preset No function Change folder
(forward) Change CD (forward)
No specified function
Previous preset No function Change folder
(back) Change CD
(Back) No specified function
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls86
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 51 Controls on the steering wheel
Fig. 52 Controls on the steering wheel
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD Audio CD mp3a) CDC Radio CD Audio CD mp3a) CDC
Volume up Continue volume up
Volume down Continue volume down
Station search. Higher fre-
quency. Following track
Station search. Higher fre-
quency. Fast forward
Change folder (forward)
Fast forward
Station search. Lower
frequency Previous track
Station search. Lower
frequency Rewind
Change folder (Back)
Rewind
AA
AB
AC
AD
Steering wheel controls 87
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cyclic source control FM - AM - CD - CDC - FM...
No specified function
Voice recognition activation Press to speak
No specified function
Make a call or
Direct access to the phone book or
Accept a call
No specified function
Terminate call or
Refuse call or
Quite telephone menu
No specified function
a) Only for mp3 compatible radio.*
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls88
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 53 Controls on the steering wheel
Fig. 54 Controls on the steering wheel
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD CD mp3a) CDC Radio CD CD mp3a) CDC
Increase the source volume and the navigation message Increase the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Station search. Higher fre-
quency. Following track
Station search. Higher fre-
quency. Fast forward
AA
AB
AC
Steering wheel controls 89
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Station search. Lower
frequency Previous track
Station search. Lower
frequency Rewind
b) Cyclic change of source
Radio - CD / CDC - Radio - ... When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen.
Repeat the last Navigation instruction
Only if the Navigation function is activated.
Silence Pause No specified function
Next preset No function Change folder
(forward) Change CD (forward)
No specified function
Previous preset No function Change folder
(back) Change CD
(Back) No specified function
a) Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format b) Button E, rapid activation: Depending on the fitted equipment, the radio frequency band may be selected.
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls90
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Fig. 55 Controls on the steering wheel
Fig. 56 Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD CD mp3a) CDC Radio CD CD mp3a) CDC
Increase the source volume and the navigation message Increase the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Station search. Higher fre-
quency. Following track
Station search. Higher fre-
quency. Fast forward
Change folder (forward)
Fast forward
Station search. Lower
frequency Previous track
Station search. Lower
frequency Rewind
Change folder (Back)
Rewind
AA
AB
AC
AD
Steering wheel controls 91
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
b) Cyclic change of source
Radio - CD / CDC - Radio - ... When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen.
Repeat the last Navigation instruction Only if the Navigation function is activated.
Voice recognition activation Press to speak
No specified function
Make a call or
Direct access to the phone book or
Accept a call
No specified function
Terminate call or
Refuse call or
Quite telephone menu
No specified function
a) Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format b) Button E, rapid activation: Depending on the fitted equipment, the radio frequency band may be selected.
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls92
Steering wheel lighting controls
The lighting is turned on using the simultaneous pressing of the following keys:
Fig. 57 Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 58 Steering wheel audio version controls
Push simultaneously...
Audio fig. 58
Audio + Telephone fig. 57
AA AB
AA AB
Unlocking and locking 93
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Unlocking and locking
Central locking
Description
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all the doors and the tailgate from one point.
Central locking can be activated using any of the following options:
the key, by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating manu- ally,
the central locking button, (electronic control) in the passenger compart- ment page 97,
the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key page 100.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle security:
- Locking system Safe
- Selective unlocking system*
- Auto-locking to prevent involuntary unlocking
- Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
- Emergency unlocking system
Note For anti-theft security, only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safety system Safe
This is an anti-theft device consisting of a double lock for the door locks and a deactivation function for the boot in order to make forced entry more difficult.
Activation
The safe system is activated when the vehicle is locked using the key or the remote control.
To activate this system with the key, rotate the key once in the door lock cylinder in the locking direction.
To activate the system using the remote control, press the lock button on the remote once.
When this system is activated, it is not possible to open the doors normally, from the outside or the inside. The boot/tailgate may not be opened. The central locking button does not work.
Voluntary deactivation
The Safe system can be deactivated voluntarily by the user.
This is done by locking two times in quick succession (in under 2 seconds). This double locking can be executed using the key or the remote control.
Using the key, rotate the lock cylinder twice in the locking direction.
To activate the system using the remote control, press the lock button on the remote twice.
When the Safe system is deactivated, the alarm volumetric sensor is also deactivated.
Unlocking and locking94
When the Safe system is deactivated, the doors are locked using the simple locking system, meaning that they may be opened from the interior but not from the exterior.
Involuntary deactivation
The methods described for deactivation of the Safe system may be executed involuntarily (for example, if we press the button because we want to lock the vehicle, and it locks as a result, however, we are not sure that it is locked and we press the button once more within 2 seconds, we will have deactivated the Safe system).
Deactivation when opening
To deactivate the system on opening, see Selective unlocking system*
Safe status
On the front left hand side door, there is a light indicator visible from the outside of the vehicle that indicates the Safe system status.
We can see that the Safe system is activated, by the flashing of the light indicator . The indicator will flash on all vehicles, whether they are fitted with an alarm or not, and until the vehicle is unlocked.
We can see that the Safe system is deactivated, when the light indicator flashes about seven times and turns off. If the vehicle is not fitted with an alarm then it remains off. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, once 28 seconds have passed since the indicator is switched off, it will start to flash again and continue until the vehicle is unlocked once more.
Remember:
Safe system activated with or without alarm: Warning lamp continuously flashing.
Safe deactivated without alarm: The warning lamp flashes seven times and stops.
Safe deactivated with alarm: The indicator flashes seven times, turns off and then continues to flash after 28 seconds.
WARNING
No one should remain in the vehicle if the Safe deadlock mechanism has been activated. It is not possible to open the doors from the inside or the outside and this would make any outside intervention difficult in case of emergency. Danger of death. People could become trapped inside in an emergency.
Selective unlocking system*
This system allows for unlocking only the driver's door, or all the vehicle.
Driver's door unlock button
This is done by a simple unlocking (once). This can be done with the key or the remote control.
With the key, rotate the key once in the lock cylinder in the unlock direction. The driver's door will be released from the Safe system, unlocked and may be opened. Once the door is opened, 15 seconds remain for turning on the ignition, in which moment, the Safe system will be deactivated on the remaining doors and the light indicator will be turned off. For vehicles fitted with an alarm, this system is deactivated.
Using the remote control, press the unlock button on the remote once. The Safe system is deactivated for all the vehicle, only the driver's door is unlocked for opening, the alarm is turned off as is the light indicator.
Unlocking all doors and the boot
So that all the doors and the boot can be opened, the unlock button on the remote must be pressed twice.
The button must be pressed twice in under 2 seconds and this will deactivate the Safe system for all the vehicle, all doors will be unlocked and the boot
Unlocking and locking 95
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
will be activated. The indicator will be turned off as will be the alarm for those vehicles fitted with one.
Unlocking the boot
See page 100 and page 104 .
Locking system for involuntary unlocking
This is an anti-theft system and will avoid situations where the vehicle is opened unintentionally
The vehicle will be re-locked automatically, if it is unlocked and neither the boot or any of the doors are opened within 30 seconds. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system to prevent access to the vehicle from the exterior when the vehicle is in transit (for example, when stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h the unlocked door(s) will be locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver's door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the ignition.
Each door may be unlocked and opened from the interior (for example when a passenger gets out). For this, simply operate the lever on the inside of the door.
WARNING
When the vehicle is moving, do not operate the internal door handles: the corresponding door will open.
Emergency unlocking system
The entire vehicle is unlocked if the airbags are triggered during an accident, except for the boot. It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside using the central locking, after turning the ignition off and back on again.
If the doors must be locked from the outside, see Manually locking the doors.
Unlocking and locking96
Emergency manual locking
This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of central locking system failure.
Locking the driver's door manually
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for the left hand side door and anti-clockwise for the right hand side door.
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Manual (emergency) locking of the remaining doors
Open the door and remove the cap fig. 59 printed with a lock image. This will expose a circular element with a groove in the centre. Insert the key into the groove and rotate the element clockwise for the right hand side doors and anticlockwise for the left hand side doors.
Replace the cap and close the door. Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver's door
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left hand side doors and clockwise for the right hand side doors.
The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door handle.
Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors
First the driver's door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate the internal door handle for the required door. If the child safety lock is acti- vated on the rear doors, when the interior door release lever is operated the door is unlocked but does not open. The exterior door handle may now be used to open the door.
Note Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it manually (emergency locking), repeat the previous instructions.
Fig. 59 Locking the doors manually
AA
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Central locking button
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from the inside using the central locking button.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button .
Unlocking the doors
Press the button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off. Except, if the "safe" security system is activated.
Please note the following when you use the central locking button to lock your vehicle:
It will not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate from the outside (this may offer extra safety, for instance when stopped at traffic lights).
The driver's door cannot be locked if it is open. This prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle.
Repeated operation of the central locking will deactivate the central locking button for 30 seconds. Once this time has passed, the button may be used once more.
There is a danger that the key may remain inside the vehicle, if the vehicle is locked using the central locking button when the driver's door is closed and, for example, the passenger door open. If this door is closed, then the keys will remain inside the vehicle.
All doors may be locked separately from inside the car. Do this by pulling the door release lever once.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped inside.
The central locking button is not operative in the following cases.
When the vehicle is locked from the outside (using the remote or the key).
While the ignition is not activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder with the key.
Note Vehicle locked, button amber colour
Vehicle unlocked, button red
Fig. 60 Centre console: central locking button
Unlocking and locking98
Childproof locks
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is moving.
This function is independent of the electronic opening and locking systems of the vehicle. It only affects the rear doors. It is only possible to activate it and deactivate it manually, as described below:
Activating the childproof lock
Unlock the car and open the door you wish to childproof.
With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni- tion key, clockwise for the left hand side doors, and anti-clock- wise for the right hand side doors fig. 61, fig. 62.
Deactivating the childproof lock
Unlock the car and open the door for which you wish to deacti- vate the childproof lock.
With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni- tion key clockwise for the right hand side doors and anti-clock- wise for the left hand side doors fig. 61, fig. 62.
When the childproof lock is activated, the door can be opened from the outside only. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated using the key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.
Fig. 61 Child safety lock on the left hand side door
Fig. 62 Child safety lock on the right hand side door
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Keys
Key set
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a remote control and a key tab with the number of the key.
The key set belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
one remote control key fig. 63 with folding key bit,
one key without remote control ,
one key tab with the key number.
Plastic key tab
Spare keys cannot be issued without the key number on the key tab fig. 63 . Therefore:
Always keep the key tab in a safe place.
Never leave the key tab in the vehicle.
If you sell the vehicle, please give the plastic key tab to the new owner.
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the keys can result in critical injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer- gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. Unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be able to steer the vehicle.
Caution There are electronic components in the key and remote control. Protect the keys from moisture and excessive vibration.
Fig. 63 Set of keys
AA
AB
AC
AB
Unlocking and locking100
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a distance.
Using the button fig. 64 (arrow) on the control, the key shaft is released.
Unlocking the vehicle fig. 64 .
Locking the vehicle fig. 64 .
Unlocking the tailgate. Press the button fig. 64 until all indicators on the vehicle briefly flash. When the unlocking button is pressed, 2 minutes remain for opening the door. Once this time has passed, it will lock once more.
Also, the battery indicator on the key fig. 64, will flash.
The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the key. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The maximum range of the remote control depends on various conditions. The range is reduced when the batteries start to lose power.
Selective unlocking*
When the button fig. 64 is used the driver's door is unlocked, all others remain locked.
Press the button fig. 64 twice to unlock all doors.
Fig. 64 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key
Fig. 65 Range of the remote control
A1
A2
A3
A3
A1
A1
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
Incorrect use of the key can result in critical injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer- gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries, accidents or the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
Note The radio-frequency remote control can also be programmed so that only the driver's door is unlocked the first time that the unlocking button on the radio frequency remote control key is pressed. When the button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
The remote control functions only when you are in range page 100, fig. 65 (red area).
If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, the vehicle will be locked again automatically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 101.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does not flash when the buttons are pushed, the battery must be replaced.
Caution Use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote control. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same size and power.
For the sake of the environment The flat batteries must be disposed of in accordance with regulations governing the protection of the environment.
Synchronising the remote control key
Synchronising the remote control key
Use both keys that have been delivered with the vehicle page 99, fig. 63, the key fitted with the remote control and
the normal key .
Unlock the vehicle from the driver side door using the key without the remote.
Turn the ignition ON using the key without the remote control.
Lock the vehicle using the driver side door lock with the remote control key page 100, fig. 64.
In a time of maximum 30 seconds the following operations must be carried out:
A1 AA
AB
Unlocking and locking102
Operate the button once for locking on the remote control, the indicators will flash.
Operate the button once for unlocking on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
The key will have been programmed and the vehicle will unlock, confirming at the same time the synchronisation.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with the remote control if the button is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective range of the radio frequency remote control. The remote control key will have to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available from Authorised Service Centres, they must be matched to the locking system.
Up to eight remote control keys can be used.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers an alarm if unauthorised move- ments are detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the mechanical key, or if unauthorised access is gained to the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when the vehicle is locked. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried out when the car is locked:
Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key
Opening a door
Opening the bonnet
Opening the tailgate
Switching on the ignition
Movements in the vehicle
Undue manipulation of the alarm
Battery handling
The horn sounds and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds. This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)
If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the car. This is done as follows:
Unfold the key by pressing the button shown by the (arrow).
Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm system remains active, but an alarm is not triggered immediately.
Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched on, the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. If you do not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds, the alarm is triggered.
How is the alarm switched off?
When the vehicle is unlocked via the unlocking button of the remote control or when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note If, after the alarm goes off, access is gained to a second secured zone (e.g. the tailgate is opened after a door has been opened), the warning signal is triggered again.
Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason.
The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon- nected while the alarm system is active.
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft alarm*, that detects unauthorized vehicle entry using ultra- sound.
The system consists of 3 sensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
Activation
It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu- metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti- vated.
WARNING
The safe security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is deactivated.
For those vehicles in which a separate sunblind is fitted in the passenger compartment, the alarm will not function correctly due to inter- ference with the sensor.
Note If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi- cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver's door. This flashing will be different to that for an activated alarm.
Unlocking and locking104
Tailgate
Opening and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
Pull on the release lever and lift the tailgate fig. 66. The tail- gate will then open.
Closing the tailgate
Grip the tailgate by one of the two handles on the interior lining and close it, using a light movement.
The system may or may not operate depending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the tailgate is locked then it cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked then the opening system is operative and the boot may be opened.
To the locking / unlocking status, press the button or the button on the remote control key.
A warning appears in the instrument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop- erly closed.* An audible warning is also given if the tailgate is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h.*
Fig. 66 Tailgate: opening from the outside
Fig. 67 The inner tailgate lining: hand hold
A1
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the lighting units.
Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the window. The glass could shatter. Risk of injury!
Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing. If not, it may open unexpect- edly while driving.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year. This could cause serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.
Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gasses may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
If only the boot is opened then do not leave the key inside. The vehicle may not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking does not operate (for example if the battery is flat)
There is a groove in the boot allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism.
Opening the tailgate from inside the luggage compartment
Insert the key bit in the groove and unlock the locking system, turning the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow
fig. 68.
Fig. 68 Tailgate: emer- gency release
Unlocking and locking106
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically
The front and rear electric windows can be operated using the controls in the driver's door.
Opening and closing the windows
Press the button to open a window.
Pull button to close a window .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended .
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons in the driver door
Button for window in front left door
Button for window in front right door
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors
Button for window in rear left door
Button for window in rear right door
Safety switch *
Safety switch in the driver door can be used to disable the electric window buttons in the rear doors.
Security control not activated: the buttons on the rear doors are activated.
Security switch activated: the buttons on the rear doors are deactivated.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.
Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
Fig. 69 Buttons on the driver's door: controls for front and rear electric windows
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A3
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled.
Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc- tion, the window will automatically open again page 107. If this happens, check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to hold down the button.
One-touch closing
Pull up the button for the window briefly to the second position. The window closes fully.
One-touch opening
Push down the button for the window briefly to the second posi- tion. The window opens fully.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
Close all windows.
Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function is now ready for operation.
The buttons page 106, fig. 69 and have two levels for opening the window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open or close windows to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not work when the ignition has been switched off, even if the key is in the ignition.
The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been temporarily disconnected, or if the battery is flat. The function then has to be reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
Roll-back function
The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk of injuries when the windows are closing.
If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops at this point and lowers immediately .
If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the normal automatic function resumes.
If the window is still obstructed, the window stops at this point.
If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to close it again within five seconds.
If you wait longer than 5 - 10 seconds, the window will open fully when you operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING (continued) A1 A2
Unlocking and locking108
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.
Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
page 108.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either opened or closed.
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Once the electric windows are completely closed, the turn indica- tors will flash.
Using the remote control
Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds. All windows which function electrically will be either opened or closed.
Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.
Once the electric windows are completely closed, the turn indica- tors will flash.
Sliding/tilting roof*
Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof
The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened and closed using the rotary button when the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 70 Roof interior lining: closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
Unlocking and locking 109
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position page 108, fig. 70 .
Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position .
Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.
Sunroof blind
The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required, it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk of accident! The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
The sliding/tilting sunroof continues to function until one of the front doors is opened and the key removed from the ignition.
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver's door in the locking position until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds. The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.
Note The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
AA
AB
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking110
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof* The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does not prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed when closing.
If the sliding/tilting roof has been opened again by the roll-back function, it can be closed only by pressing the rotary button at the front in position
fig. 71 until the sliding/tilting roof has closed fully. Please note that the sunroof will now close without the roll-back function.
Operation in the event of a breakdown
In the event of a breakdown, the sunroof may be closed manually.
Remove the plastic cover by inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
Remove the lever from the cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far as possible (pushing against the spring) and close the sliding roof.
Fit the lever back into position.
Fig. 71 Roof interior lining: closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
Fig. 72 Emergency closing handle
AA
Lights and visibility 111
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the side lights
Turn the light switch fig. 73 to position .
Switching on dipped headlights
Turn the light switch to position .
Switching off the lights
Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog lights*
Pull the switch out of position or to the first stop. The symbol in the light switch lights up.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
Pull the switch out of position or to the second stop . A warning lamp lights up in the control panel.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
Pull the switch out of position to the last stop. A warning lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
WARNING
Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped headlights if it is dark or if visibility is poor.
Note The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.
If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, a buzzer sounds when the driver door is opened. This is a reminder to switch off the lights.
Fig. 73 Description of the instrument panel: lights control, antifog lights and rear antifog light
Lights and visibility112
If the coming home* feature is activated, the acoustic signal for the dipped beam headlights will not sound, it will sound if the position lights are activated.
The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically be switched off.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory requirements.
Automatic lighting
Activation
Rotate the switch to the position Auto, this indication will light up.
When the switch is in this position, as soon as visibility conditions are reduced, the lights are automatically activated. The indication Auto, changes to red.
Automatic lighting
If the automatic headlight control is switched on, dipped headlights are auto- matically switched on by a light-sensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel, for example.
The rain function switches on the headlights if the continuous wipe function is switched on for longer than 5 seconds. The dipped beam headlights are switched off if the continuous wipe or the intermittent wipe functions are switched off for longer than 255 seconds .
WARNING
If automatic headlight control is switched on, the headlights will not be switched on in fog or heavy rain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be switched on.
Note For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is removed from the ignition, the acoustic signal will only sound if the light control is in the position or if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming home function.
If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory requirements.
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
Fig. 74 Automatic lighting
Lights and visibility 113
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Coming home / leaving home function*
After dark the area around the car is lit up with the aid of the coming home / leaving home function.
Coming home function*
To activate the function
Put the light switch into the position or in the Auto position for those vehicles fitted with the automatic lighting function.
Remove key from ignition switch.
To deactivate the function
Turn light switch to position 0
When the system is activated and it is dark, the coming home function will illuminate the vehicle and its surroundings by switching on the dipped head- lights, rear lights and number plate lights when the driver's door is opened.
While one of the doors or the tailgate are open, the dipped headlights, the rear lights and the registration plate lighting remain on for about 90 seconds. If, before this time is up, all of the doors and the tailgate are closed, another 40 seconds of lighting is given. However, if all of the doors and the tailgate are closed after the 90 seconds have passed, the system will be deactivated and the lights will not come on.
If you wish to reactivate the system, you must start from the beginning.
The lighting time is defined at the time of manufacture.
Leaving home function*
The function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control. In the dark, the leaving home function will light the dipped beam lights, the rear lights and the registration plate lighting for about 40 seconds.
Note If the vehicle is used often during the night for short trips using the coming home function, this will place a heavy demand on the battery. To avoid this, make longer journeys whenever possible.
Observe all relevant statutory requirements when using the lighting systems described here.
For those vehicles fitted with the Dot Matrix display, the Coming home function for the headlights (about 40 seconds) can be adjusted using the Configuration, lights and visibility menu
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the thumb wheel fig. 75 .
Fig. 75 Instrument panel: regulation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control
A1
A1
Lights and visibility114
Headlight range control
Using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the headlight range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. In this way it is possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same time, the driver has the best possible lighting for the road ahead using the correct headlight settings.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on. To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
Those vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge headlights are fitted with an automatic headlight range system.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic move the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for instance when:
reaching the tail end of a traffic jam
there is an emergency
your vehicle breaks down due to a technical defect
you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. That is that the two turn signal indicator lamps and the indicator lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
Hazard warning light activation
The hazard warning lights are automatically activated in case of sudden braking above a speed of 6 kmh or when the ABS is activated for a prolonged period in order to warn vehicles behind. If the vehicle accelerates at more than 40 kmh then the hazard warning lights are automatically turned off.
A2
A2
A2
Fig. 76 Instrument panel: switch for hazard warning lights
Lights and visibility 115
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire!
Note The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time, even if the ignition is switched off.
The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rele- vant statutory requirements.
Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following functions:
Switching on the turn signals
Move the lever all the way up fig. 77 to indicate right, and all the way down to indicate left.
Signalling a lane change
Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur resistance and then release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash.
Fig. 77 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
A1
A2
A1 A2
Lights and visibility116
Switching main beam on and off
Turn the light switch to position .
Press the lever forward page 115, fig. 77 to switch on the main beams.
Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head- lights off again.
Headlight flasher
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the flasher.
Switching on parking lights
Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the lock.
Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand parking lights respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other drivers.
Note The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre- sponding warning lamp or flashes in the combi-instrument. The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the warning lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn
signal bulbs are damaged, warning lamp does not light up. You should have the bulb replaced.
The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the combi- instrument.
The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the combi-instrument.
When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.
If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave the parking light on.
A3
A4
Lights and visibility 117
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Interior lights
Front interior light type 1
The switch fig. 78 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat- ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition lock and turn off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the position .
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to the position O fig. 78.
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour- tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Front interior light type 2
The switch fig. 79 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat- ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition lock and turn off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 78 Interior roof lining: front passenger compartment lighting
AA Fig. 79 Interior roof lining: front passenger compartment lighting
AA
Lights and visibility118
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the position .
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to the position O page 117, fig. 79.
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour- tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Front reading lights Switching on the reading light
Press the corresponding button fig. 80 and fig. 81 to switch on the reading light.
Switching off the reading lights
Press the corresponding button to switch off the reading light.
Fig. 80 Interior roof lining: front reading lights, type 1
Fig. 81 Interior roof lining: front reading lights, type 2
AB AB
Lights and visibility 119
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Rear interior and reading lights*
The switch fig. 82 is used to select the following positions:
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position fig. 82 , the interior and reading lights are switched off.
Switching on the reading light
Turn the switch to position (left reading light) or to position (right reading light).
Courtesy light position
Turn the control to position . The interior lights are automatically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition lock The light turns off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
Turn the control to position .
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour- tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of their mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 83
.
Fig. 82 Interior roof lining: interior rear lighting and reading lights.
AC
A1
A2 A4
A3
A5
Fig. 83 Sun visor on the driver side
A1
Lights and visibility120
The make-up mirrors in the sun visors have covers. When you open the cover , a lamp in the roof lights up.
The lamp* in the roof lining will go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed back or the sun visor is pushed back up.
Note The roof lamp will turn off about 10 minutes following the removal of the igni- tion key. This prevents the battery discharging.
Windscreen wipers
Front windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers and the automatic wash and wipe.
The windscreen wiper lever fig. 84 has the following positions:
Switching off the wipers
Move the lever to position .
Intermittent wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the intervals. Control to the left: large intervals; control to the right: short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set using switch
.
Slow wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Continuous wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Brief wipe
Move the lever down to position to give the windscreen a brief wipe. The wiper will start to move faster if you keep the lever pressed down for longer than 2 seconds.
Wash and wipe automatic system
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel - Position . The wash function will start immediately and the wipers will start with a slight delay. The wash and wiper systems will function at the same time at speeds of over 120 km/h.
Return the lever back to the rest position. The wipers will keep running for approximately four seconds.
A2
Fig. 84 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever
A0
A1
AA
AA
A2
A3
A4
A5
Lights and visibility 121
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Optional heated windscreen in the wiper blade* area (page
In some countries and with some versions, there is the possibility of heating the windscreen in the area of the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de- icing in the zone.
This function is activated by turning the exterior heated rearview mirror* control forwards page 125.
WARNING
Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.
In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.
Always note the corresponding warnings on page 217, Changing windscreen wiper blades.
Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
For vehicles fitted with an alarm and certain versions, the windscreen cleaning only operates when the ignition is switched on and the bonnet is closed.
When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the lever is moved to position 0, they are totally hidden.
The next speed down will automatically be selected if speed page 120, fig. 84 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed will be resumed when the vehicle starts again
The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once the automatic wipe/wash system has been operated while the vehicle is in transit.
When the intermittent wipe function is on, the intervals are directly proportional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the intervals.
The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper back on again.
Before removing any objects that may be trapped in the side areas of the windscreen, always move the wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).
A2 A3
Lights and visibility122
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Switching on the rain sensor
Move the windscreen wiper lever into position fig. 86.
Move the control to the left or right to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor. Control to the right: high level of sensitivity. Control to the left: low level of sensitivity.
The rain sensor is part of the interval wipe function. You will have to switch the rain sensor back on if you switch off the ignition. This is done by switching the wiper intermittent function off and back on.
Note Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may cause sensor disruption or faults.
Fig. 85 Rain sensor*
Fig. 86 Windscreen wiper lever
A1
AA
Lights and visibility 123
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Rear window wiper
The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Switching on the interval wipe
Press the lever forwards to position fig. 87. The wiper will wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel. The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the windscreen wiper and washer system
Press the lever fully forwards to position fig. 87. The wash function will start immediately and the wiper will start with a slight delay. The windscreen wash system will function as long as you hold the lever in this position.
Return the lever back to the rest position. The wiper then wipes for approximately 4 seconds, and then in intervals again.
Return the lever back to the rest position. The washer system stops and the wipers function.
WARNING
A worn or dirty wiper blade will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
Always note the corresponding warnings on page 217, Changing windscreen wiper blades.
Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass before using the wiper for the first time. If you switch on the wiper when the wiper blade is frozen to the glass, this could damage both the wiper blade and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wiper will only function when the ignition is switched on and the tailgate is closed.
In reverse gear, with the windscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind- screen wiper will make one wipe.
Fig. 87 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: rear windscreen washer
A6
A6
A7
Lights and visibility124
Headlight washer system
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped headlights or main beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head- lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer spray.
To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and off as desired.
Switching off anti-dazzle function
Press button fig. 88. Warning lamp goes out.
Switching on anti-dazzle function
Press button fig. 88. Warning lamp is lit.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on. The green indicator lamp lights up in the mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is activated the interior mirror will darken auto- matically according to the amount of light it receives (for example from the headlights of a vehicle behind). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if reverse gear is engaged.
Fig. 88 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.
AA AB
AA
Lights and visibility 125
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.
If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob fig. 89 to position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn knob to position R (right exterior mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the car .
Heating the exterior mirrors*
Turn the knob forwards to the central position fig. 89 so that the heated rear view mirrors warm up and the heated wind- screen* in the wiper blade rest area is activated page 121.
Folding in exterior mirrors*
Turn the control fig. 89 to position to fold in the exterior mirrors. You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if you are driving through an automatic car wash. This will help prevent damage.
Folding the rear-view mirrors with the comfort* system
The external rear-view mirror will automatically be folded in with the comfort system (using the control or the key).
To unfold it, open the door and turn the ignition on.
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the extended position*
Turn the knob to another position to fold the exterior mirrors back out .
Synchronised mirror adjustment
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
Fig. 89 Exterior mirror control
A1
Lights and visibility126
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.
Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer needed. Fuel is wasted otherwise.
Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
For vehicles with external electric folding rear-view mirrors, note the following: if the adjustment of the mirror housing is altered by any external force (for example, an impact during a manoeuvre), fold it in completely elec- trically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as described before.
Seats and stowage 127
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seats and stowage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat position is very important for:
fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
relaxed posture that does not cause drowsiness,
safe driving page 7,
and to ensure that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protection page 19.
WARNING
If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.
Never transport more people than there are seats available in the vehicle.
Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 46, Child safety.
The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.
Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. This also applies to passengers. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in the event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incor- rect sitting position.
It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury. The distance between the driver and the steering wheel or between the front passenger and the dash panel should always be as great as possible.
Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is stationary. This also applies to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the rear seats. Otherwise your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore injury. In addition, while adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents.
Special guidelines apply to installing a child seat on the front passenger seat. When installing a child seat, observe the warning note in the page 46, Child safety.
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage128
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and, as a very minimum at eye level
fig. 90 and fig. 91.
Adjusting the head restraints page 129.
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.
Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event of a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu- pant's size.
Fig. 90 Front view: head- rest and seatbelt correctly adjusted
Fig. 91 Side view: head- rest and seatbelt correctly adjusted
Seats and stowage 129
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head restraint downwards.
Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head restraint downwards.
Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in one of its positions page 14.
Angle adjustment (front seats)
Press the head restraint forward or back to the required position.
Removing the head restraint
Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Press the button fig. 92 (arrow).
Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restraint into the guides on the rear backrest.
Push head restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint to suit body size page 14 and page 13.
WARNING
Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury.
Never drive if the head restraints are in an unsuitable position, there is a risk of serious injury.
After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly for height to achieve optimal protection.
Please observe the safety warnings page 128, Correct adjustment of head restraints.
Fig. 92 Adjusting and removing the head restraints
Seats and stowage130
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
The control elements in fig. 93 are mirrored for the front right- hand seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
Then release the grip and move the seat further until the catch engages.
Adjusting the seat height*
Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
Adjusting the backrest angle
Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.
Adjusting the lumbar support*
Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel to adjust the lumbar support.
The backrest curvature of the cushioned area is determined by the settings made in the lumbar region. This supports the natural curvature of the spine very effectively.
WARNING
Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is stationary.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far to the rear. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be achieved only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and front passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to improper positioning of the belt web!
Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height or forwards/back- wards position. Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due care and attention.
Fig. 93 Front left seat controls
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
Seats and stowage 131
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri- cally.
Turn the appropriate thumb wheel fig. 94 to switch on the seat heating. The seat heating is switched off in the 0 position.
The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The left thumb wheel controls the left seat and the right thumb wheel the right seat.
Caution To avoid damaging the heating elements, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
Rear seat bench
Seat adjustment
Fig. 94 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating
Fig. 95 For unlocking the rear seat
Fig. 96 Rear seat back- rest angle adjustment
Seats and stowage132
The seats may be moved forwards or backwards independently. The movement can be 1/3 or 2/3 of the seat. There are various possible positions.
Adjusting reach
In the seated position, unlock the lever in the direction of the arrow page 131, fig. 95.
Move the seat cushion forwards or backwards to the desired position.
Backrest angle adjustment
Hold the backrest at the top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat page 131, fig. 96 in the direction of the arrow and hold the
loop in this position. Push the backrest to the required position and release the loop.
WARNING
Adjust the seat only when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore injury.
Do not push the seatbacks down until the seat is moved, this is to avoid damage to the centre console.
Ensure that the seat, once moved, is fixed in position.
Note In order to maintain the maximum luggage compartment space, put the seatbacks in position normal, without moving.
In order to maintain the maximum space without putting the seatbacks down, move the seats forward to the desired position.
Folding the seat backrests down
Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 97 .
In this position the back rest is locked. This is the reason why the loop located on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the backrest.
WARNING
You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.
The locking system loops on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be used to secure any items.
A1 Fig. 97 Folding or opening the rear seat backrests
A1
Seats and stowage 133
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Folding the rear seat backrests down
Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 98 in the direction of the arrow and lift the seat backrest into position.
WARNING
You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.
The locking system loops on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be used to secure any items.
After locking the seat backrest into position ensure that the seat belts protrude from the seat.
Stowage compartments
Stowage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 99.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event of an accident.
Fig. 98 Folding or opening the front seat backrests
A1 Fig. 99 Passenger side: stowage compartment
Seats and stowage134
Centre arm rest at front with stowage area
There is a stowage area in the armrest.
To open the stowage area, lift the armrest up in the direction of the arrow fig. 100 and then lift the cover.
To access the CD loader* or the lower stowage area, pull on the armrest cover without pressing on the button.
To close the stowage area, push the armrest down.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage area closed while the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of injury from the armrest during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event of an accident.
Note The CD changer is located in this compartment.
Stowage areas under the front seats
There is a stowage locker with a cover under each front seat.
The drawer* fig. 101 is opened by pushing the button and putting the cover back.
There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres- sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if too much pressure is applied.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
Fig. 100 Front armrest with stowage area
Fig. 101 Stowage area under the front seats
AA
Seats and stowage 135
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.
Do not drive with the drawer cover open. There is an injury risk for passengers if the cargo is released in case of sudden braking or an accident.
Folding tray*
Folding tables are fitted to the rear of the front seat backrests.
To open the table, open it up in the direction of the arrow fig. 102.
WARNING
The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.
Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Caution When driving, do not leave open containers in the cup holders. The drink might be spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.
Fig. 102 Folding tray for the front left hand side seat
Seats and stowage136
Stowage in the luggage compartment*
There is a variable stowage area* in the luggage compart- ment floor.
Lift the luggage compartment floor and fold it back all the way fig. 103.
Fit the separator fig. 104, into the side grooves depending on the size of the objects to be transported. The onboard tool kit and the spare wheel are located underneath the luggage compartment.
Note The folding table is designed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier loads fold up the table and remove.
Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle page 268.
Fig. 103 Foldable luggage compartment cover
Fig. 104 Luggage compartment divider
AA
Seats and stowage 137
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Luggage compartment retaining net
There is a retaining net in the luggage compartment for securing objects.
Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage compartment to attach the retaining net fig. 105.
Note The folding table is designed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier loads fold up the table and remove.
Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle page 268.
Other stowage areas
Other stowage areas can be found:
in the centre console,
in the door trims (front and rear),
in the side trims of the luggage compartment,
in the spare wheel recess in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles with an optional anti-puncture kit*.
The clothes hooks are located on the rear roof handles.
WARNING
Do not store loose objects on the dashboard. These objects could be flung through the passenger compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g. while accelerating, braking or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of accident.
Ensure that no objects can fall from the centre console or other stowage areas into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or accelerator. Risk of accident.
Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver's view. Risk of accident. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light arti- cles of clothing. Do not leave any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging articles of clothing. During sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- cially those involving airbag deployment, these objects could injure the vehicle occupants.
Fig. 105 Retaining net
Seats and stowage138
Drinks holders at the front
In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders fig. 106.
WARNING
Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could cause injury in the case of an accident.
Rear drink holder*/ Armrest*
Fig. 106 Front drink holder
Fig. 107 Opening the rear drink holders
Fig. 108 Rear armrest/drink holder
Seats and stowage 139
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Opening and closing the armrest*/ drink holder*
To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow page 138, fig. 107 .
To close, lift the Drink holder*/ armrest* in the direction of the arrow page 138, fig. 108
WARNING
Ensure that the load in the luggage compartment is correctly secured with the retainer net when travelling with the armrest down page 137.
Multi-purpose* mobile stowage compartment - Fitting and removal
This stowage compartment may only be placed in the central area of the rear seat
Fitting mobile stowage compartment
Fold down the small section of the rear seat back rest, in order to access the large section of the back rest.
Fit the mobile stowage compartment mounting plate fig. 110 from the inside of the vehicle, through the rear
section of the seat. It should be fitted between the back rest and the seat, in the central seat area.
Push the plate until it clips the cushion frame. The rings of the mobile stowage compartment mounting plate appear at the front of the seat.
If it is difficult to make the plate clip, tilt the rear back rest of the large section forwards slightly and then lean the back rest back- wards to make the fitting of the mobile stowage compartment onto the mounting plate easier.
A1
A2
Fig. 109 Mobile stowage compartment Installation
Fig. 110 Mobile stowage compartment mounting plate
AH
Seats and stowage140
Place the mobile stowage compartment onto the foam of the central seat.
Set both mounting pieces together page 139, fig. 109, with both mounting rings page 139, fig. 110 and press hard until both the clips completely connect with the rings.
Removing mobile stowage compartment
Pull each of the buttons page 139, fig. 109 on the clips (red buttons) forwards, until they snap out of place.
Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile stowage compartment mounting plate.
Multi-purpose* mobile stowage compartment - General information
This stowage compartment may only be placed in the central area of the rear seat
AE
AG
AF
Fig. 111 Mobile stowage compartment Opening
Fig. 112 Mobile stowage compartment Uses
Seats and stowage 141
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Opening
Lift the cover , in area page 140, fig. 111.
Closing
Push the cover down, until it clips into place.
Uses of the mobile stowage compartment
The front open glove box may be used to store small objects that will not damage passengers in the event that the objects are flung around the interior of the vehicle.
The drink holders are used for holding drink cans or cups.
The elastic belt on the side may be used for keeping papers and maga- zines.
The tables may be used as a support for writing.
To use the table page 140, fig. 112, it must be removed from its compartment on the side of the mobile stowage compartment and fitted into compartment page 140, fig. 112on the front section of the mobile stowage compartment.
The table in the right-hand compartment is fitted in the left-hand compart- ment of the front of the mobile stowage compartment and the table in the left- hand compartment is fitted in the right-hand compartment.
The tables have two positions for use and cannot be interchanged.
WARNING
The mobile stowage compartment supports a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload.
Do not drive when the cover of the mobile stowage compartment is open.
Do not drive when the tables are set up for use.
When the vehicle is moving, keep the tables stored inside the mobile stowage compartment with the cover closed, and likewise when they are not in use
Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. The drink may spill and cause burns when the vehicle is moving.
Do not leave cans in the drinks holder when the vehicle is in motion, there is a danger that the can may be flung around the vehicle and cause injury.
Make sure that the mounting plate is correctly clipped onto the cushion frame.
When the plate is not in use, store inside the stowage compartment.
When the mobile stowage compartment is not in use, it should always be fastened by the retaining net in the luggage compartment.
Note Check that the mobile stowage compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it forwards by the front glove box and checking that both safety clips are correctly clipped onto the rings.
AB AA
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage142
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets
Ashtray*
Opening and closing the ashtray
To open the ashtray, lift the cover fig. 113.
To close, lower the cover.
Emptying the ashtray
Extract the ashtray and empty.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray.
Cigarette lighter*
Press on the cigarette lighter fig. 114 to activate it .
Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.
Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the glowing coil.
WARNING
Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start a fire.
Take care when using the cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns, risk of injury.
The cigarette lighter also works when the ignition is off and when the ignition key is removed. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children unsu- pervised in the vehicle.
Fig. 113 Ashtray located in the front drinks holder
Fig. 114 The cigarette lighter is located in the electric socket on the front of the centre console
Seats and stowage 143
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Electrical sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12-volt sockets.
Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12-volt socket in the front console fig. 115 or to that of the boot* The appliances connected to each socket must not exceed a power rating of 120 Watt.
WARNING
The electrical sockets and any appliances connected to them are also func- tional with the ignition switched off and the key removed. Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Note Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off will drain the battery.
Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions on page 199.
Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)
Lift the AUX. cover fig. 116.
Insert the pin fully (See the radio manual).
Fig. 115 Socket, centre console, front
Fig. 116 Auxiliary audio connection
Seats and stowage144
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in a stowage box under the luggage compart- ment cover fig. 118.To open this storage compartment, turn the knob 90 fig.
Note The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle's standard equipment.
First-aid kit and fire extinguisher
The first aid box* is kept in the stowage box under the luggage compartment cover.
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the luggage compartment carpet by Velcro.
Note The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's standard equipment.
The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements.
Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. You should purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the first-aid kit has expired.
The fire extinguisher must comply with legal requirements.
Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the next date for checking.
Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc- tions on page 199.
Fig. 117 Warning triangle storage under the rear cover
Fig. 118 Opening the storage compartment
Seats and stowage 145
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Luggage compartment
Stowing luggage
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles well at all times:
Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible.
Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps on the fastening rings.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious injuries.
Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and change the way the vehicle handles.
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit- able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.
When you transport heavy objects, always keep in mind that a change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.
Please observe information on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.
Caution Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the rear window and cause damage.
Note The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
Seats and stowage146
Luggage compartment cover
Removing the cover
Disengage the loops fig. 119 from the retaining pins .
Extract the cover from its slot, in its rest position and pull outwards. The storage compartment should remain closed.
To remove the storage compartment
Open the storage compartment by turning the knob 90 page 144, fig. 118.
Pull outwards until the compartment is freed from the pivot point fig. 120.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the luggage compartment cover, this will endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
Note Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment cover, rear visibility is not reduced.
Only the warning triangle* and other lightweight objects should be stored in the storage compartment.
Roof carrier*
Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT should be used.
It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installa-
Fig. 119 Luggage compartment cover
Fig. 120 Removing storage shelf
AB AA
Seats and stowage 147
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
tion manual. Not following these instructions may lead to paintwork damage or marks on the bodywork.
Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and check them at regular intervals.
Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for each roof carrier system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly over the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the entire roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should the total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the chapter on Technical Data.
When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an increased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit- able speed and driving style must be used.
For those vehicles fitted with a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere with the load on the roof carrier system when opened.
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning148
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning
Heating and ventilation
Controls and equipment
Using the controls fig. 121 and and the control you can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or . When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperature
With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera- ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Rear window heating
This function will be switched off automatically approximately 20 minutes after being switched on. It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing the button
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic .
Fig. 121 On the dash panel: Heater controls
A1 A4 A5
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 149
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective- ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the ambient air.
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
Air distribution towards the windscreen. Air recirculation is, for safety reasons, not possible in this position.
Air distribution to the upper body.
Air distribution to footwell
Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well.
Blower
The airflow can be set at four speeds with the control . The airflow should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa- tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windows.
In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
Note Please observe the general notes page 157.
A4
A5
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning150
Climatic*
Control switches
The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.
Using the controls fig. 122 and and the control the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed may be set.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button , or . When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector page 151
Button Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off page 151
Button Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto- matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing the button.
Button Air recirculation mode page 152
Air distribution control page 151
Blower switch. There are four speed settings for the airflow. The airflow should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windows.
Fig. 122 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A1 A5 A6
A2
A3 A4
A1
A2 AC
A3
A4
A5
A6
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 151
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note Please observe the general notes page 157.
Heating and cooling the interior
Heating of the vehicle interior
Turn the temperature selector fig. 123 clockwise to select the required temperature.
Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
The airflow may be directed as desired using the airflow distribu- tion control: (towards the windscreen), (towards the bust), (towards the footwell) y (towards both the wind- screen and the footwell).
Cooling the passenger compartment
Switch on the air conditioner using the button page 150, fig. 122 .
Turn the temperature selector anti-clockwise until the desired cooling output is reached.
Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
Fig. 123 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A1
AC
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning152
Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the foot well).
Heating system
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature, but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by the following reasons:
The engine may not be running.
The blower is switched off.
The ambient air temperature is lower than +3 C.
The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a quali- fied workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from entering the vehicle.
Fig. 124 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 153
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Air recirculation mode page 152, fig. 124 prevents strong odours in the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective- ness of the air heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the incoming ambient air.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective- ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the ambient air.
For reasons of safety, air recirculation is not possible when the control for air distribution is set to the windscreen setting .
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Therefore, you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
2C-Climatronic*
Control switches
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right.
Fig. 125 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning154
The air conditioning system only works when the engine is running and the blower is switched on.
Press the temperature control buttons page 153, fig. 125 or in order to adjust the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand side respectively.
The functions will be switched on when the buttons are pressed. When these functions are activated, they are indicated in the display. Also, the de-icing and rear heated window functions will turn on along with their corresponding yellow symbol. Press the button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the vehicle interior.
Display of the selected interior temperature for the left side.
Button Manual air recirculation mode
Button Central air distribution
Button Downward air distribution
Button Upward air distribution
Display of the selected interior temperature for the right side.
Button defrost function for the windscreen. The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen. The air recirculation mode, if switched on, will be switched off as soon as the defrost function is switched on. At temperatures over 3 C, the air conditioning system will be switched on automatically and the blower speed will be increased by one level in order to dry the air. The button lights up yellow and the symbol appears in the display.
Button Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto- matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the symbol appears in the display.
Temperature selector for the left side page 154
Blower control page 155
Button Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off page 155
Button Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution control page 154
Button Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system off
Temperature selector for the right side page 154
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windows.
Note Please observe the general notes page 157.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, airflow and distribution are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the vehicle interior.
Switching on automatic mode
Press the button page 153, fig. 125. AUTO is shown on the display.
A9
A14
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11 OFF
A12 AUTO
A13 ECON
A14
AUTO
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 155
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Press the temperature selectors to set the desired temperatures for the left and right sides of the interior. We recommend 22C (72F).
A comfortable interior climate is quickly reached when a temperature of +22C (72F) is set in automatic mode. It can be changed as necessary to suit individual preferences or particular circumstances. It is possible to select interior temperatures from +16C (61F) to +29.5C (86F). These are approx- imate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
Climatronic maintains a constant temperature level fully automatically. The temperature of the air supplied to the interior, the blower speed and the air distribution are regulated automatically. The system also allows for the effect of strong sunlight, so there is no need for manual adjustment. Therefore, automatic mode provides the best comfort for the vehicle occupants in virtu- ally all conditions throughout the year.
Automatic mode is switched off whenever an adjustment is made using the buttons for the air distribution, airflow or . The temperature will continue to be regulated within the parameters manually selected by the user.
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, airflow and distribution as required.
Switching on manual mode
To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons fig. 126 to
, or press the airflow control . The symbol will disappear from the display.
ECON
Fig. 126 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
A3
A5 ECON A10 AUTO
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning156
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector. It is possible to select interior temperatures from +16C (61F) to +29.5C (86F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If a temperature below 16C (61F) is selected, the display switches to LO. In this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature is not regulated.
If a temperature above 29.5C (86F) is selected the display switches to HI. In this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature is not regulated.
Blower
The airflow may be adjusted freely using the control . Always have the blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the vehicle. Pushing the button to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons , and . It is also possible to open and close some of the air vents separately.
Switching the air conditioning system on and off
Pressing the button switches off the air conditioning system to save fuel. The temperature continues to be regulated. The set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the ambient temperature.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from entering the vehicle.
Press the button page 155, fig. 126 to switch air recir- culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol appears in the display .
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective- ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the ambient air.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective- ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger compartment rather than the ambient air.
For reasons of safety, air recirculation is not possible when the control for air distribution is set to the windscreen setting .
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Therefore, you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
A10
ECON
A2
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 157
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
General notes
The pollen filter
The pollution filter (a combined particle filter and active carbon filter) serves as a barrier against impurities in the ambient air, including dust and pollen.
For the air conditioning system to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen filter must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air pollution, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than stated in the Service Schedule.
Caution If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch off the air condi- tioner with button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a qualified workshop.
Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and special tools. Therefore, we recommend that you take the vehicle to a quali- fied workshop should problems occur.
Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool under- neath the vehicle, this is completely normal and there is no need to suspect a leak.
Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling is not impaired, and to prevent the windows misting over.
The air from the vents flows through the passenger compartment and is extracted by slots designed for this purpose. Do not cover these slots with articles of clothing or other objects.
The air conditioning system operates most effectively with the windows and the sliding/tilting roof* closed. However, if the sun has heated up the vehicle, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows for a short period.
Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air conditioning system leaves a residue on the evaporator, producing a permanent unpleasant odour.
It is advidable to connect the air conditioning at least once a month, to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling capacity is detected, an Authorised Service Centre should be consulted to check the system.
ECON
Driving158
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely adjusted to suit the driver.
Adjust the driver seat to the correct position.
Push the lever under the steering column fig. 127 down .
Adjust the steering wheel in this way until the correct position is set fig. 128.
Then push the lever up again firmly .
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an incor- rect seating position can result in serious injury.
To avoid accidents, the steering column should be adjusted only when the vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident.
Fig. 127 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Fig. 128 Proper sitting position for driver
Driving 159
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your breast bone page 158, fig. 128. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you decide if special specific modifica- tions are necessary.
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
ESP helps make driving safer in certain situations.
The Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP) contains the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). The ESP function works in conjunction with the ABS. Both warning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started.
In specific circumstances where you require less traction, you can switch off the ESP by pressing button fig. 129 .
For example:
When driving with snow chains,
when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 129 Centre console: ESP button
Driving160
when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for example.
You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer need wheel spin.
The TCS and EDL are also switched off if the ESP is switched off. That is to say, these systems are not available while ESP is not activated.
When does the button light up or flash?
It lights up when the ignition is switched on and should go out again after about 2 seconds.
It will start flashing to indicate that ESP is counteracting an unstable driving condition.
It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
WARNING
The electronic stabilisation program (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 177, Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition key
Ignition switched off, steering lock
In the position fig. 130 the ignition and the engine are OFF and the steering may be locked.
For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it locks with an audible sound. You should always lock the steering wheel when you leave your vehicle. This will help prevent theft of the vehicle .
Switching on the ignition or glow plug system
Turn the ignition key to this position and let go of the key. If the key cannot be turned or is difficult to turn from position to position , move the steering wheel (to take the load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key turns freely.
Fig. 130 Ignition key positions
A0
A1
A0 A12
Driving 161
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Each time that the vehicle must be started, the ignition key must be turned to the position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition key from the lock. The steering lock could be activated immediately - Risk of accident!
Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short period. This is especially important if you must leave children or disabled people in the vehicle, they could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the windows possibly resulting in an accident.
Unsupervised use of the keys could result in the engine being started or electrical systems, such as the electric windows, being used. This can result in serious injury.
Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto- matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with the correct code.
Note The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT key.
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with the correct code.
Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the clutch pedal fully and hold it in this position, the starter will then only have to turn the engine.
Turn the ignition key to position page 160 to start the engine.
A2
A0
A2
Driving162
Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the starter motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may need to press the accelerator briefly.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after about half a minute. If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 239, Fuses.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately 50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc- tions page 257, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with the correct code.
Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the clutch pedal fully and hold it in this position, the starter will then only have to turn the engine.
Turn the ignition key to the starting position.
Turn the ignition key to position page 160, fig. 130 . The indication lamp will light for engine pre-heating.
When the warning lamp goes out, turn the key to position to start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.
Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts, the starter motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If there are problems starting the engine, see page 257.
A1
A2
Driving 163
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary load on the battery, do not use any other major elec- trical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp page 81 goes out.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal (up to one minute) to start the engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is because the system must eliminate air first.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately 50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc- tions page 257, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
Stopping the engine.
Turn the ignition key to position page 160, fig. 130 .
After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It is also possible that it will turn itself on once more if the temperature of the coolant increases due to the elimination of built up heat in the engine compartment or if this is heated due to prolonged exposure to the heat of the sun.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine until the vehicle is stationary.
The brake servo works only when the engine is running. You will need more strength to brake the vehicle when the engine is switched off. As you cannot brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury.
The steering lock can engage immediately when the key is removed from the ignition lock. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
A0
Driving164
Caution If the engine has been driven hard for a long period, the engine could over- heat when it is switched off. Risk of engine damage. For this reason, you should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.
Manual gearbox
Driving a car with a manual gearbox
Selecting the reverse gear
The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the clutch right down.
Place the gear lever into neutral gate and push the lever all the way down.
Slide the gearlever to the left, and then into the reverse position shown on the gear lever.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When the engine is running, before engaging this gear wait about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed in fully in order to protect the gearbox.
The reversing lights come on when the reverse gear is selected and the igni- tion is on.
Fig. 131 Centre console: diagram for 5 speed manual gearbox
Fig. 132 Centre console: diagram for 6 speed manual gearbox
Driving 165
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released.
Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci- dent.
Note Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. The pressure of your hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary wear and damage.
Do not hold the car on the clutch on hills. This causes premature wear and damage to the clutch.
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
Selector lever positions
Selector lever positions indicated on the cover
P Parking position (lever locked).
R Reverse position.
N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral position for manual gearboxes).
D Drive position (economic driving program).
S Sports driving position.
+/- Tiptronic driving position (this program is similar to the operation of a manual gearbox).
Fig. 133 Centre console: selector lever for auto- matic gearbox / direct shift gearbox (DSG)
Driving166
Driving programs
The automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox has two driving programmes
Selecting the normal program
Put the selector lever into position D to drive forwards.
Put the selector lever into position R to reverse. This position is shared by all programs for reversing.
Selecting the sport program
Move the lever to position S.
If you have selected the normal driving programme D, you will drive in a more economical driving mode. This program selects a higher gear earlier rather than remain in a lower gear.
If you select the sport programme, S, the program is designed for a sports mode, that is, a programme which changes up at higher engine speeds to use the full power of the engine. This program is not recommended for use on the motorway or in the city.
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
Releasing the selector lever lock
Start the vehicle.
Press and release the brake pedal, at the same time press the button on the selector lever.
Fig. 134 Program selec- tion
Fig. 135 Deactivating the lock
Driving 167
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The lock is only activated when the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less than 5 km/h. At higher speeds, the lock is automatically released in position N.
For rapid changes of position (e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the lever remains in the position N more than one second then it is locked. With the automatic lock, the lever is prevented passing from P and N to any other gear without first pressing the brake pedal.
The selector lever must be put in the position P in order to remove the key.
Driving with an automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
The drive and reverse gears are automatically engaged.
Driving
Press and hold the foot brake.
Press on the button on the selector lever knob (on the left, fig. 136.
Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).
Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to engage, a light jerk will be felt.
Release the brake and accelerate.
Short stop
Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be put into the positions P or N for this.
Do not press the accelerator.
Parking the vehicle
Press the foot brake and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to the position P and release the button.
Driving slowly
Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to put the lever into Tiptronic mode.
Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.
Hill stop
Hold the vehicle, in all cases, using the foot brake to prevent rolling back.
Fig. 136 Driving
Driving168
Do not try to slow the vehicle using another forward gear (engine braking).
Descending gradients
With the gear engaged, release the brake and accelerate.
The steeper the gradient the lower the gear must be for effective engine braking. For example, if 3rd gear is used on a very steep gradient, the engine braking is insufficient and vehicle accelerates. So that the engine speed does not become excessive, the gearbox changes to the next highest gear. Depress the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to 3rd gear.
WARNING
The driver should never leave the vehicle while the engine is running or with any gear selected. If for any reason you must leave the vehicle with the engine running, apply the handbrake and move the selector lever to posi- tion P.
When the engine is running and the positions D, S or R are selected, it is necessary to hold the vehicle with the foot brake because the vehicle will creep at a low speed.
Never accelerate while changing the position of the selector lever (risk of an accident).
The selector lever must never be moved into the positions R or P while moving (risk of an accident).
Before descending a steep gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic program to select a lower gear.
If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake to avoid rolling back.
The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a
reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in braking distances.
Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the use of the Tiptronic program is recommended to keep the speed reduced.
Caution Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill, even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage. Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.
If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be lubricated.
WARNING (continued)
Driving 169
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Using the Tiptronic gear system
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to manually select gears
Changing gear with Tiptronic
Put the lever in the position D and press towards the right to enter the Tiptronic gate.
Press the gear lever forwards (+) to select a higher gear.
Press the gear lever back (-) to select a lower gear.
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when you park.
Applying the handbrake
Pull the handbrake lever up firmly fig. 138.
Releasing the handbrake
Pull the lever up slightly and press the locking knob in the direc- tion of the arrow fig. 138 and guide the handbrake lever down fully. .
Fig. 137 Changing gear with Tiptronic
Fig. 138 Handbrake between the front seats
Driving170
Always apply the handbrake firmly. This prevents you driving with the hand- brake applied .
The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied and the ignition switched on. The warning lamp goes out when the hand- brake is released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following message* will appear in the instrument display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an audible warning is given.
WARNING
Never use the handbrake to slow down the vehicle when it is in motion. The braking distance is considerably longer, as braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of accident!
If it is only partially released this will cause overheating of the rear brakes, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an accident. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake pads/linings.
Caution Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. The first gear should also be selected.
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.
Apply the handbrake.
The first gear should also be selected.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle .
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll against the kerb if it did start to roll.
If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point towards the kerb.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away from the kerb.
Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and selecting first gear.
WARNING
Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.
Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever / selector lever.
Driving 171
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Acoustic parking aid system*
Rear parking aid
The parking aid system will use an acoustic signal to warn of the approach of any object towards the rear of the vehicle.
Description
The acoustic parking aid system will measure the distance between the rear of the vehicle and any possible obstacle using four ultrasonic sensors located on the rear bumper. The measuring range of the sensors starts at approxi- mately and depending on the nature of the obstacle at a distance of:
side of the rear bumper: 0.8 m
centre of the rear bumper: 1.3 m
Activation
The system is activated by engagement of the reverse gear. A brief acoustic signal confirms the activation and correct function of the system.
Reversing
The distance warning will begin as soon as an obstacle is detected by the system. The frequency of the bleeps emitted by the system will increase rapidly as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
Within a short distance of about 25 cm, a continuous signal sounds (stop signal). The driver should not reverse any further.
Trailer towing
For vehicles fitted with a tow bar by the manufacturer, the parking aid system will not be activated by the engagement of the reverse gear when pulling a trailer, as the trailer's electric connecter will be plugged into the vehicle.
To avoid system malfunctions, when not driving with a trailer, remove the trailer hitch.
Possible faults
If a continuous bleep sounds for some seconds when the reverse gear is engaged, this indicates that there is a fault in the parking aid system.
If the fault continues until the ignition is turned off, the acoustic signal warning of the fault will not be emitted every time the system is reactivated (by engaging the reverse gear). Thus, the system ready indication will not sound either. Have the fault repaired by an Authorised Service Centre as soon as possible.
If there is no ready signal or no acoustic warning signal then the parking aid loudspeaker is faulty and may not warn of obstacles.
To ensure that the system works properly, the sensors must be kept clean and free of ice and snow.
WARNING
The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles may not be detected.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.
The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver must take full responsibility for parking and other manoeuvres.
WARNING (continued)
Driving172
Caution Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains, thin posts or trailer draw bars, high kerbs or painted railings etc) may not always be detected by the system, so there is a risk of damaging the vehicle in such cases.
Obstacles with uniform edges and bumps may not be detected immedi- ately by the system due to their geometry. Take special care around this type of obstacle such as corners, rectangular objects, etc.., these can cause damage to the vehicle.
Be especially carefully when manoeuvring into a corner between two perpendicular walls. Survey the approach of the wall to the side of the vehicle (using the mirrors)
The parking aid system does not replace use of the mirrors for manoeu- vres.
Distant ultra-sonic sources (hammers, tyres, construction machinery, other vehicles with PDC) may interfere with the operation of the system.
Periodic cleaning of the sensors, take care not to damage or scratch them. When cleaning with high-pressure washers or steam cleaners, the sensors should be sprayed for only a very short period and from a distance of more than 10 cm.
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Description
The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h.
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel- erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible to drive at constant speed.
For safety reasons the cruise control system should not be used in dense traffic, in sections with bends or where roads conditions are poor (e.g. aquaplaning, loose chippings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci- dent.
Always switch off the CCS when you have finished using it. This will prevent you using it by mistake.
It is dangerous to use a set speed that is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Note The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending gradi- ents. The vehicle will accelerate under its own weight. Use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.
Driving 173
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Switching on the system
Push the switch fig. 139 to the left to the position ON.
Switching off system
Push the switch to the right to the position OFF or turn the ignition off if the vehicle is stopped.
When the cruise control is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator on the instrument panel is lit.19)
If the cruise control system is switched off, the symbol is switched off. The system will also be switched off fully when the 1st gear is selected.*
Setting speed*
Press the lower part of the rocker switch once briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set, SET fig. 140 .
When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held constant.
19) Depending on the model version
Fig. 139 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AB
AB
Fig. 140 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
Driving174
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or the brake.
Setting a higher speed
Press the upper part of the rocker switch RES fig. 141 to increase the set speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate for as long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
Press the lower part of the rocker switch SET- to reduce the set speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the new speed is stored.
When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case, however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored again.
Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the brake pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part of the rocker switch RES+ fig. 141 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed that is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Switching off system temporarily*
The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:
if the brake pedal is depressed,
Fig. 141 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
AA
AA
Fig. 142 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
Driving 175
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
if the clutch pedal is depressed,
if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,
when the lever is pressed in the direction of OFF without being fully engaged.
To resume cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the rocker switch RES page 174, fig. 142 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed that is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Turning off the cruise control system*
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition off.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG* automatic gearbox
To completely deactivate the system, the selector lever must be put in one of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or, the ignition should be turned off if the vehicle is stopped.
AB
AA
Fig. 143 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
Intelligent technology 177
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Tips and Maintenance
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
If the brake servo is not functioning, for example if the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.
Brake assist system (BAS)*
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force. This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
The brake assist system intervenes here, if you press the brake pedal very quickly, the brake assist system registers an emergency situation. It then very quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing the braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. The brake assist system switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.
WARNING
The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep your distance to the vehicle in front, and when the road surface is slippery or wet. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist system.
The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
Intelligent technology178
Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel. The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter- vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted page 223.
If the running gear or brakes are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS could be severely limited.
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the car is accelerating.
Description and operation of the traction control system during acceleration (TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel drive vehicles losing traction during acceleration. The system works in the entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, the TCS will also be out of action.
TCS helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip- pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The TCS is switched on automatically when the engine is started. If necessary, it may be turned on or off pushing the button on the centre console.
When the TCS is off, the warning lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left switched on at all times. Only in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of the wheels is required, should it be disconnected for example
With compact temporary spare wheel.
When using the snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 179
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
WARNING
It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi- ciency of the ABS and TCS.
Electronic stabilisation program (ESP)*
General notes
The electronic stabilisation program increases the vehicle's stability on the road.
The electronic stabilisation program helps to reduce the danger of skidding.
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and Steering manoeuvre recommendations.
Electronic Stabilising Program (ESP)*
ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen- sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front wheel on the outside of the turn.
Steering manoeuvre recommendations
This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend to destabilize its trajectory to the right to or to the left. In this case the ESP recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering manoeuvre from the power steering.
This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in critical situations.
The vehicle doesn't steer itself with this function, the driver has full control of the vehicle at all times.
WARNING
It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Intelligent technology180
Caution In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi- ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS.
Note To disconnect using the ESP button, page 159
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking page 178.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac- tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip- pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The system will control the revolutions of the drive wheels using the ABS sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
page 78.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ- ences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the other driven wheel via the differential.
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.
Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi- ciency of the EDL. page 199
The traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the car is accelerating page 178.
Driving and the environment 181
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
Do not drive faster than three quarters of top speed.
Do not accelerate hard.
Avoid high engine revolutions.
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 km
Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and its oil consumption reduced.
Running in tyres and brake pads
New tyres should be run-in carefully for the first 500 km. New brake pads should be run-in carefully for the first 200 km.
During the first 200 km, you can compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. If you need to make an emer- gency stop, the braking distance will be longer with new brake pads than with brake pads that have been run-in.
WARNING
New tyres do not give maximum grip to start with, and require running- in. This may cause an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the first 500 km.
New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction properties during the first 200 km. However, the reduced braking capacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.
Braking effect and braking distance
The braking effect and braking distance are influenced by driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often drive in town traffic, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by an
Driving and the environment182
Authorised Service Centre more frequently than recommended in the Service Schedule.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example after driving through water, after heavy rainfall or after washing the car, the braking effect will be reduced as the brake discs will be wet, or possibly frozen (in winter): Dry the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times
The brake fluid must be changed every two years at the latest. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This prevents the brakes developing their full braking effect.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk of accidents.
New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km. However, the reduced braking capacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. This also applies when new brake pads are fitted.
If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads that have been gritted with salt, braking power may set in later than normal.
On steep descents if the brakes are excessively used they will over heat. Before driving down a long steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
Never let the brakes rub by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and will increase the braking distance. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the relevant instructions before purchasing accessories page 199, Modifications.
If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.
Exhaust gasses purification system
Catalytic converter*
To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter
Always use unleaded petrol.
Do not run the fuel tank dry.
For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil page 212, Topping up engine oil .
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary page 257.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the nearest qualified workshop. In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light up when any of the described symptoms occur page 72. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the environment. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment 183
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Fire hazard!
Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with dry grass or inflammable materials under the vehicle.
Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is driven.
Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank, in this case, the irregularity of the fuel supply may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the exhaust under some conditions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be reme- died by changing to another brand of fuel.
Diesel engine particle filter*
The diesel engine particle filter eliminates soot produced by burning diesel.
The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. The soot particles accumulate in the filter where they are regularly burned. In order to facilitate this process, occasional journeys at speeds of
more than 60 kmh should be made. If the vehicle is only used for short trips then the soot will build up in the particle filter.
WARNING
The diesel engine particle filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Caution Vehicles equipped with a diesel engine particle filter must not be refuelled using biodiesel (RME), given that the fuel system may be damaged.
Driving abroad
Notes
For driving abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa- tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded fuel.
In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi- tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service Centres may only carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the technical preparation of your vehicle in addition to necessary maintenance and repair possibilities.
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment184
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Further information is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
Adjusting simple headlights for driving on the left
On the right hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the right-hand side to the left-hand side fig. 144.
On the left hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left- hand side to the right-hand side fig. 145.
Fig. 144 Right headlight
Fig. 145 Left headlight
Driving and the environment 185
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Covering simple headlights for driving on the right
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to the right-hand side.
On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to the right-hand side.
Covering bi-xenon headlights for driving on the left
Fig. 146 Right headlight
Fig. 147 Left headlight
Fig. 148 Right headlight
Fig. 149 Left headlight
Driving and the environment186
On the right hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the right-hand side to the left-hand side page 185, fig. 148.
On the left hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left- hand side to the right-hand side page 185, fig. 149.
Covering bi-xenon headlights for driving on the right
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to the right-hand side.
On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to the right-hand side.
Trailer towing
What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer?
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip- ment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see
page 201.
Fig. 150 Right headlight
Fig. 151 Left headlight
Driving and the environment 187
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is available from any SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight / draw bar loading
Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper gradients.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer. Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.
The figures for trailer weights and draw bar weights that are given on the data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for the towing bracket, are given in the registration documents Section Technical data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissible pressure shown on the sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
Note Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recom- mend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.
Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may be stored in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the ball coupling of the towing bracket.
Driving and the environment188
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.
Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For this reason it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially when driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snaking. Never try to stop the snaking by increasing speed.
Always brake in good time. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be caused by the trailer wheels locking. Select a low gear in good time before going down a steep descent. This enables you to use the engine braking to slow down the vehicle.
Heating
At very high temperatures and during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear and high engine speed, always monitor the temperature indicator for the coolant page 55.
Electronic Stabilisation Program*
Do not switch off the ESP* when towing a trailer. The ESP* makes it easier to stabilise if the trailer starts to snake.
Driving economically and with respect for the environment
General notes
Fuel consumption depends largely on your personal driving style.
Fuel economy, environmental impact and wear on the engine, brakes and tyres depend largely on three factors:
Personal driving style
Conditions of use (weather, road surface)
Technical requirements
By adopting an economical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. This section suggests methods of lessening the impact on the environment and reducing your operating costs at the same time.
Driving and the environment 189
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Think ahead when driving
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. If you think ahead when driving, you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. Wherever possible, let the vehicle roll slowly to a stop, for instance when you can see that the next traffic lights are red.
Regular servicing
By taking your car to an Authorised Service Centre for regular servicing you can establish a basis for good fuel economy before you start driving. A well- serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Check the oil level every time you fill the tank page 211. Oil consumption depends to a great extent on the engine load and engine speed. Depending on your personal driving style, oil consumption can be up to 1 litre per 1,000 km.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their proper working temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions.
Directly after a cold start, the engine uses about 50-70 litres of fuel per 100 km. This figure then drops to 20-30 litres per 100 km after about one kilometre. The engine only reaches its working temperature after about four kilometres, when fuel consumption will return to a normal level. You should therefore avoid short journeys.
The ambient temperature has a decisive influence.
The illustration shows the different rates of fuel consumption for the same distance at both +20C and -10C. Your vehicle will use more fuel in winter than in summer.
Fig. 152 Fuel consump- tion in litres per 100 km at two different ambient temperatures
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle190
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your vehicle.
Regular care
Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects, bird drop- pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect.
After the period when salt is put on the roads it is important to have the underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Car care products
Car care products are available from your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the product instructions until you have used up the product.
WARNING
Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep out of children's reach. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or
your vehicle. The use of certain products may produce noxious vapours; these should be used in well ventilated areas.
Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. There is a fire / explo- sion risk.
Before you wash your vehicle, or carry out any maintenance, switch off the engine, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the igni- tion.
Caution Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage the paintwork or glass on your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of water.
For the sake of the environment When purchasing car care products, try to select ones which are not harmful to the environment.
Left over car care products should not be disposed of with ordinary house- hold waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 191
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car washes
The paint is so durable that the car can normally be washed without problems in an automatic car wash. However, the effect on the paint depends to a large extent on the design of the car wash, the brushes used, the filtering of the wash water and the type of detergents and wax solutions used, etc.
After the car has been washed, the brakes could respond later than normal as the brake discs and brake pads will be wet, or even frozen in winter. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times
page 181, Braking effect and braking distance.
WARNING
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Washing by hand
Washing the vehicle
First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off.
Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Start on the roof and work your way down. Use only light pressure.
Rinse the sponge or glove as much as possible.
Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
Clean the wheels, sill panels etc. last using a different sponge or glove.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
Dry the surface of the vehicle gently using chamois leather.
If it is cold, dry the rubber seals and the surfaces they touch with a cloth to prevent them freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber seals.
After cleaning the vehicle
If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the vehicle. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes care- fully several times page 181, Braking effect and braking distance.
WARNING
The ignition must always be switched off before the vehicle is washed.
Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of injury.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Caution Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehicle.
Washing the vehicle at low temperatures: if the vehicle is rinsed with a hose, do not direct the water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle192
doors, luggage compartment, or bonnet. Otherwise there is a risk of malfunc- tion.
For the sake of the environment In the interests of environmental protection, the car should be washed only in specially provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage system. In some districts, washing vehicles anywhere else may be prohibited.
Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner, particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.
Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted bumpers.
Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from windows page 193.
Never use concentrated jet nozzles or so-called dirt blasters .
If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the vehicle. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes care- fully several times page 181.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet or cylindrical jet (rotating nozzle). Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Caution Do not use water hotter than 60 C. This could damage the car.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, maintain a sufficient distance from sensi- tive materials for example: flexible hoses, plastic, sound proofing, etc. This is especially important for bumpers painted in the same colour as the vehicle. The closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
Waxing the car
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your car if water does not form small drops and run off the paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality hard wax is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
A good coat of wax helps to protects the paintwork from environmental contaminants page 190. It is also effective in protecting against minor scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car wash, it is advisable to protect the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a year.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 193
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be brought back by applying wax. Polish can be obtained from your Author- ised Service Centre.
The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax compounds to seal the paint page 192, Waxing the car.
Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:
Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or on plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents will damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with special solvent- free plastic cleaning and care products.
Caution The use of liquid air conditioners directly over the air vents of the vehicle may damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors
Cleaning the windows
Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol based glass cleaner.
Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
Removing snow
Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mirrors.
Removing ice
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. Chamois leathers which have been used on painted surfaces are not suitable for use on windows. They will be soiled with wax deposits which would smear the windows.
If possible use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one direction only. Do not move it to and fro.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean off rubber, oil, grease and silicone deposits.
Wax deposits have to be removed with a special cleaner which is available from your Authorised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper blades to judder. A window cleanser specifically for removing wax will stop the blades juddering if added to the windscreen washer fluid. Grease removing cleansers will not remove wax deposits.
Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle194
The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating elements on the inside of the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential for clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades.
2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.
Care of rubber seals
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The weather strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the surface.
Caution To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.
Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheels
Clean steel wheels regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheels should be repaired before the metal starts to rust.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 195
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 181, Braking effect and braking distance.
Cleaning alloy wheels
Every two weeks
Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheels.
Every three months
Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. It is important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at regular intervals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheels.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used. If the protective coating is damaged, e.g. by stone impact, the damaged area should be repaired immediately.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 181, Braking effect and braking distance.
Underbody sealant
The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect it from corro- sion and damage.
The protective coating could be damaged when driving. We recommend that the protective coating under the body and on the running gear should be checked, and reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend that repair work and additional anti-corrosion work is carried out by your Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! This is a fire hazard.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle196
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti- corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle, the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and after the salting period.
Your Authorised Service Centre is able to provide the correct cleaning and preserving products and has the necessary equipment. For this reason, we recommend having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned. If this job is carried out, you should ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment afterwards.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 206
Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition before you open the bonnet.
Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
Do not clean the underside of vehicle, wheel arches without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle.
Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!
For the sake of the environment Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed. The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason, engine washing should be carried out only by a qualified workshop or a suit- able filling station.
Care of the vehicle interior
Cleaning plastic parts and the dash panel
Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash panel.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and surface of the airbag module with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 197
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning wooden trim*
Clean the wooden trim with a clean cloth moistened with water.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap solution.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning cloth seat covers and fabric trim
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.
Cleaning leather*
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution (pure liquid soap; two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water) and a cloth.
Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the seams.
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Leather care
The leather should be treated regularly (about twice a year) with a special leather-care product, which is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
Apply these products very sparingly.
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the special qualities of leather, as a natural product. Because of the natural properties of the specially selected hides employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc. so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather should be protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-quality natural leather are normal.
Caution Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar products on leather.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle198
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified workshop.
Cleaning seat belts
A dirty belt may stop the seat belt working properly.
Keep the seat belts clean and check all seat belts regularly.
Cleaning seat belts
Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and leave it out.
Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
Allow the seat belt fabric to dry.
Do not roll up the seat belt until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts the belt will not retract correctly into the auto- matic belt retractor.
WARNING
Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that the belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.
Check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.
Caution After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up. Otherwise the belt retractors could become damaged.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 199
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical changes to your car, we recommend that you consult your Authorised Service Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac- turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts . This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in question is suitable, reliable and safe. Authorised Service Centres have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are installed correctly and professionally.
Despite continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability, safety and suitability of parts not approved by SEAT. For this reason SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically- controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator
fan, etc.), these must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or drink holders, should never be fitted on the covers of, or within the working range of, the airbags. If they are, there is a danger of resulting injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Modifications
Modifications must always be carried out according to our specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components are linked together in networks, other systems may be affected by the faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of components, and also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
SEAT Authorised Service Centres cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work performed incorrectly.
For this reason, we recommend that all work should be performed by an Authorised Service Centre using genuine and SEAT approved parts and accessories.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications200
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a collapsible roof aerial* with antitheft system*, which can be folded backwards, when, for example, going through an automatic carwash.
To fold
Unscrew the aerial rod, tilting it backwards into a horizontal position and then screw in again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to that given in the previous instruction.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios
An external aerial is required for mobile phones and two-way radios.
SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with mobile telephones and two-way radios providing the following conditions are observed:
The correct installation of an external aerial,
transmitting power of maximum 10 watts.
An external aerial is needed to give the equipment its optimal range.
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele- phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power in excess of 10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be fitted only by a qualified workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while driving you could have an accident.
Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units or within the range of the airbags, danger of injury if the airbag is triggered.
If you use mobile telephones or two-way radios in the vehicle without an external aerial, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed authorised limits. This also applies to external aerials that have not been correctly installed.
Caution Failure to observe the above conditions could cause the electronics to malfunction. The most common causes of faults are:
no external aerial,
external aerial incorrectly installed,
transmitting power in excess of 10 watts.
Note Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way radio.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 201
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Fig. 153 Attachment points for towing bracket
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications202
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are underneath the vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should never be lower than the measurement indicated when the vehicle is fully loaded including the maximum resting weight.
Measurement for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
344 mm
531 mm
1,044 mm
1,040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
Driving with a trailer implies additional work for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
Observe the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa- rate warning lamp).
Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper must be removed and reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be used to connect to the vehicle's electrical system. This requires specialist knowledge and tools.
The figures in the illustration show the dimensions and attachment points which must be observed if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.
If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is serious danger of an accident.
For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the towing bracket.
Caution If the electrical socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to the vehicle's electrical system.
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 203
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi- mately 55 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
Lift the lid.
Grip the cap and then insert the key into the lock and rotate 180 to the left.
Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a click.
Turn the key in the lock, without releasing the cap in the clock- wise direction 180.
Remove the key and close the flap until it clicks into place. The tank cap is secured with an anti-loss attachment
The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as soon as the tank is full. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap, Further notes on fuel can be found.
WARNING
Fuel is highly inflammable and can cause serious burns and other inju- ries.
Never smoke or use any naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the vehicle, or a spare fuel canister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.
For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident and leak.
If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following points:
Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This may be fatally explosive. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.
Fig. 154 Tank flap open
Checking and refilling levels204
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.
If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and cause damage.
For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off; this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Petrol
Petrol types
The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = European Norm).
The types of petrol differ in their octane rating, for example: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON = unit of anti-detonation resistance). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one recommended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel consumption and engine power.
Caution Even one full tank of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter.
High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter.
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and service life of the engine. For this reason you should use good quality petrol containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur, the required additives must be added during refuelling.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 205
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on filling with fuel page 203.
RME fuel*
Only those vehicles fitted with special equipment (number PR 2G0 for biodiesel use) may use biodiesel corresponding to the standard DIN EN 14214.
The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.
Biodiesel is a methylester obtained from rapeseed oil.
DIN is a German abbreviation for D eutsches Institut fr Normug e.V., the German standards institute.
EN means European Norm.
FAME is the English abbreviation Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
If the date sticker of the vehicle includes the number PR 2G0 optional equip- ment) this means that that vehicle has been prepared for biodiesel use.
Your Authorised Service Centre or automobile association will be able to advise on where you can obtain RME biodiesel fuel.
Your Authorised Service Centre can also be consulted to know if the vehicle has been prepared for biodiesel use.
Things to note about RME fuel (biodiesel)
The performance of a vehicle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.
Fuel consumption of a vehicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.
RME fuel can be used in winter at temperatures down to approx. -10C.
At outside temperatures below -10C, we recommend using winter diesel fuel.
Caution RME fuel can damage the fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably adjusted.
If you decide to use biodiesel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel which is DIN E 14,214 compliant.
If you use biodiesel that does not meet the required standard, the fuel filter could become clogged.
Note In case of low exterior temperatures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of higher than 50%, an increase in gas emission may occur during operation of the independent heating.
The fuel filter may become clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For this reason, we recommend that, about every 300 or 400 km, following a fuel change, also change the fuel filter. Also. note the instructions in the inspec- tion and maintenance plan.
If the vehicle is to remain parked for more than about two weeks, we recommend filling the fuel tank with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in order to avoid damage to the injection system.
Checking and refilling levels206
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to paraffin separation. For this reason, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries during the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel sold generally has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to approx. -24C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15C .
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start at temperatures of under -24C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for a while.
Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thinners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.
Working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart- ment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear stick to neutral or the selector lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet page 208.
You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work carried out by a qualified workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, are being constantly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. For this reason we recommend that you have service fluids and consumables replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. Please observe the relevant instructions page 199. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a hazardous area. .
Checking and refilling levels 207
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire.
Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector lever to position P.
Keep children away from the vehicle.
Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.
Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 258. The battery could explode.
Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition!
Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.
If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.
If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following points:
Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting clothes.
Always think carefully about pressing the accelerator if a gear is engaged in either an automatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.
If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo- nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above warnings:
Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
Do not smoke.
Never work near naked flames.
Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
Caution When changing or topping up service fluids, make absolutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Failure to observe this point will result in serious malfunctions and engine damage!
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels208
For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are in rest position.
To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dashboard fig. 155 in the direction indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
released by a spring action .
Lift the bonnet using the release lever (arrow) and open the bonnet.
Release the bonnet stay and secure it in fixture designed for this in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment.
Fig. 155 Details of the driver-side foot well: bonnet release lever
Fig. 156 Arrester hook for bonnet.
Checking and refilling levels 209
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully open the bonnet.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 206
Closing the bonnet
Raise the bonnet slightly.
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.
Engine oil
Engine oil specifications
The engine oil used must conform with exact specifications.
Specifications
The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme cold.
As the use of high quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or replacement is necessary use only those oils that conform to the requirements of the VW standards.
If it is not possible to find oil conforming to the VW standards then oil conforming to the ACEA or API standards with an appropriate viscosity at atmospheric temperature should be used instead. The use of this type of oil may have some repercussions on the performance of the engine for example, long starting time, increased consumption and a higher emission level.
If a top up is required then different oils may be mixed as long as they all conform to the VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should appear on the container of the service oil; the container will display together the different standards for petrol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for both types of engines.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels210
Oil properties
Viscosity
The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.
When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short period, an oil change is not required.
Mono-grade oil
Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to ranges of viscosity20).
These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very warm.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Fig. 157 Types of oil according to temperature
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
Diesel VW 505 00/ VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Injector Pump a)
a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Injector Pump Motor 118 kWa) VW 506 01/ VW 507 00
Diesel Engines with Particulate filter (DPF)a) VW 507 00
20) Viscosity: oil density
Checking and refilling levels 211
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on page 206 .
Park the vehicle on an even surface.
After stopping the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump.
Raise the bonnet page 208.
Pull out the dipstick.
Wipe the dipstick with a cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level fig. 158.
Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far as it will go.
The position of the dipstick is shown in the corresponding engine compart- ment diagram page 268.
If the oil level is in area fig. 158 , do not top up with oil.
If the oil level is in area , you may top up with oil (approx. 0,5 l).
If the oil level is in area , you must top up with oil (approx. 1,0 l).
It is normal for the engine to consume a certain amount of oil. Consumption can be up to 1.0 litres per 1,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a journey.
When the engine is working hard, for instance during sustained high-speed motorway cruising in summer, when towing a trailer or climbing on mountain passes, the oil level should preferably be kept within area and not above this.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 206
Fig. 158 Engine oil dipstick.
AA
AB
AC
AA
Checking and refilling levels212
Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with small quantities of oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on page 206 .
Unscrew cap from oil filler opening fig. 159.
Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.
To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before adding any more oil.
As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 268.
Engine oil specification page 209.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.
Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work- shop.
For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the exhaust system.
AA
Fig. 159 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
AB
AA
AA
Checking and refilling levels 213
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by an Authorised Service Centre.
The two different oil change intervals are shown in the Booklet Service schedule.
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings page 206, Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
.
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries caused by splashes of oil.
When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- zontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children until it is disposed of.
Caution No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil and filter changed by an Authorised Service Centre.
Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large enough to hold all the engine oil
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi- tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of our coolant additive G 12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F (it is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of the antifreeze additive G 12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60% coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40C.
Checking and refilling levels214
WARNING
The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.
The coolant additive G 12+ must be added in sufficient quantities to provide anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that can be expected. At extremely cold ambient temperatures, the coolant could freeze, causing the vehicle to breakdown. As the heater would also not work in this situation, there is a risk of suffering exposure!
Caution Other additives may give considerably inferior corrosion protection. The resulting corrosion in the cooling system can lead to a loss of coolant, causing serious damage to the engine.
The coolant additive G 12+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12 (red) or G 11. Never mix G12 (red colour) with G 11.
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func- tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on page 206 .
Opening the coolant expansion tank
Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap .
Checking coolant level
Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the coolant level.
Fig. 160 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap
Checking and refilling levels 215
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If the level is underneath the MIN mark, top up with coolant.
Topping up coolant
Only use new coolant.
Do not fill above the MAX mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 268.
Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications page 213. Do not use a different type of additive if coolant additive G 12+ is not avail- able. In this case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up to the correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive
page 213.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the MAX mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.
The coolant additive G 12+ (dyed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red) and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 206
When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.
Caution When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown. If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do so will result in engine damage!
If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels216
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Topping up washer fluid
The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be mixed with washer fluid.
The windscreen washer and the headlight washing system are supplied with fluid from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment.
The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We recom- mend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter- gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 206.
Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen washer fluid.
Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Fig. 161 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.
Checking and refilling levels 217
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Changing windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of the wipers to the service position.
Service position (for changing wiper blades)
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 8 seconds have elapsed), move the windscreen wiper lever to the intermittent wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the service position.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
Push the side buttons, free the blade and pull in the direction of the arrow fig. 163.
Fitting the wiper blade
Insert a blade of identical length and design into the wiper arm.
Slide the blade until it clicks into position.
Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
The windscreen wiper arms return to their original position when the ignition is turned on and the windscreen wiper lever is operated, or when driving faster than 6 km/h.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind- screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified workshop and corrected if necessary.
Fig. 162 Windscreen wipers in the service posi- tion
Fig. 163 Changing the front wiper blades
Checking and refilling levels218
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This could cause damage.
Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.
Note The wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the bonnet is properly closed.
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm away from the glass fig. 164.
Unclip the wiper blade and pull fig. 164.
Fitting the wiper blade
With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.
With the other hand, press the wiper blade into the retainer.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned if soiled.
Fig. 164 Changing the rear window wiper blade
A1 A2
Checking and refilling levels 219
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If this is not sufficient, refer to a qualified workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the window.
Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service schedule.
Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It should always be between the MIN and MAX marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 268. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
Fig. 165 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover
Checking and refilling levels220
However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instru- ment panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low page 72.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 206.
Changing the brake fluid
The brake fluid must be renewed every two years.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by an Authorised Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings in Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on page 206 in Working in the engine compartment.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which could impair the braking effect.
For this reason the brake fluid must be renewed every two years.
It is important that you use only use brake fluid compliant with the US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 206.
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
Have the brake fluid changed every two years at the latest. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.
Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing environmental regulations.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 221
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Battery
Warnings on handling the battery
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical system:
Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles containing lead.
Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi- ately.
Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited. When handling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0C.
Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a damaged battery immediately.
Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo- nents.
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec- tive gloves and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels222
If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect the battery from frost. If it freezes it will be damaged.
Checking the electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high- mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.
Open the bonnet and open the battery cover at the front in Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on page 206 in Warnings on handling the battery on page 221.
Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the battery.
If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart- ment diagram page 268.
The round window (magic eye) on the top of the battery changes colour, depending on the charge level and electrolyte level of the battery.
If the colour in the window is colourless or bright yellow, the electrolyte level of the battery is too low. Have the battery checked by a qualified workshop.
The colours green and black are used by the workshops for diagnostic purposes.
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re- charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec- ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.
Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Warnings on handling the battery on page 221.
Checking and refilling levels 223
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly when you replace them.
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark location.
Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel rims.
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in page 181.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by an Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua- planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
New tyres do not have maximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- larly carefully to avoid risk of accident.
Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage.
Checking and refilling levels224
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The values refer to Summer tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2 bar to the values given on the sticker.
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a journey.
WARNING
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style and fitting.
Fig. 166 Tyre tread wear indicators
Fig. 167 Changing wheels
Checking and refilling levels 225
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators page 224, fig. 166 running across the tread. Depending on the make,
there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica- tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export countries .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month
page 224.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable to change them around as shown page 224, fig. 167. All the tyres will then last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun- tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align- ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater risk of aquaplaning.
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres- sures.
If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe handling .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
Checking and refilling levels226
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Ratio of height to width in %
R Indentification mark for Radial
15 Diameter of the wheel in inches
91 Load indication
T Speed indication mark
The tyres could also have the following information:
A direction of rotation symbol
Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner side of the wheel).
DOT ... 1103 ... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centre has full information on the technical require- ments when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
WARNING
We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle handling. Risk of accident.
Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than six years old. If you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all times.
Never use old tyres or those with an unknown history of use.
If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the brakes is not restricted. This could cause them to overheat.
All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
Note For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 227
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car - even if it is the same model page 199.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Caution The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicles handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures specified for summer tyres (see sticker on tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis- tration documents. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.
The speed rating code page 225, New tyres and wheels determines the following speed limits that apply to winter tyres:
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require- ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel page 225, New tyres and wheels.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.
For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.
Checking and refilling levels228
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre sizes page 266.
Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more that 9 mm, including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer.
Caution You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow. Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.
Note In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The legal requirements of the country should be followed.
If and when 229
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If and when
Tools, spare wheel and tyre repair kit
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment .
Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a finger in the fitting.
Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle.
The tool kit includes:
Jack*
Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
Towing eye
Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided on certain models / model years, or are optional extras.
WARNING
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts. It is impossible to tighten the bolts with the torque required, risk of accident.
The jack* supplied by the manufacturer is only designed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads, risk of injury.
Use the jack* only on firm, level ground.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack, risk of accident.
If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be secured by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
WARNING (continued)
If and when230
Compact temporary spare wheel*
The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles not equipped with an anti-puncture kit) should only be used when necessary.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the compact temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the compact temporary spare wheel is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary spare wheel. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact tempo- rary spare wheel.
If you should have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the compact temporary spare in place of one of the rear wheels. You can then attach the snow chains to the wheel taken from the rear and use this wheel to replace the punctured front wheel.
WARNING
The tyre pressures must be checked and corrected as soon as possible. The tyre pressure for the spare wheel is 4.2 bar. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering, risk of acci- dent.
Never use two or more compact spare tyres at the same time, risk of accident.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit (for vehicles not including a spare wheel) is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre Mobility System Tyre repair kit.
The tyre repair kit consists of a container with sealing compound to repair the puncture and a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration of a foreign body into the tyre.
Fig. 168 Luggage compartment. Access to the spare wheel
If and when 231
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible with the sealing compound.
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as level as possible.
All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below
Pull off the hub cap. Also refer to page 232.
Slacken the wheel bolts.
Raise the car with the jack in the corresponding zone.
Take off the wheel and then put on the spare wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolts firmly in diagonal sequence with the box spanner.
Replace the hub cap.
If and when232
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart- ment and secure it.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as possible.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque is 120 Nm.
Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque checked.
In the interest of safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt torque has been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must be removed to gain access to the wheel bolts.
Removing
Insert the extraction hook from the tools into the designated ring, located in one of the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
fig. 169.
Pull off the hub cap.
Fig. 169 Changing the wheel: Pull off the hub cap
If and when 233
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel bolts
Removing
Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put pressure initially on the point of the cut out for the valve. Then press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all round.
Loosening the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Loosening
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
Grasp the box spanner by the end turn it about one full turn to the left fig. 170.
Tightening
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
Grasp the box spanner close to the end and turn the bolt to the right until it is secured.
An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts .
Fig. 170 Changing the wheel: loosening wheel bolts
If and when234
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci- dent.
Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip.
If and when 235
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Raising the vehicle
The vehicle must be raised with a jack to remove the wheel.
Locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel being changed fig. 171.
Wind up the jack under the jacking point until the arm of the jack is directly below the vertical rib under the door sill.
Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits around the rib under the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat on the ground fig. 172.
Raise the vehicle until the defective wheel is just clear of the ground.
Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points fig. 171. A position has been made for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good support. Use a large and stable base, if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
WARNING
Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Fig. 171 The jacking points
Fig. 172 Fitting the jack
If and when236
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be completed.
Change the wheel as described below after loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
Removing a wheel
Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface
fig. 173.
Fitting a wheel
Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the condition of the wheel and hub mounting surfaces. These surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the wheel bolts when they are loose. The reversible screwdriver blade should be removed when the tool is used for this purpose.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of rotation.
Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel bolts.
Fig. 173 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket tool for the bolts
Fig. 174 Anti-theft wheel bolt
If and when 237
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go page 236, fig. 174.
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Code number
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi- cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)
General information and safety notes
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a tyre puncture, sealing compound and an air compressor are located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra- tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
Instructions for the sealing compound are located on the sealing compound container.
Notes for the proper use of the air compressor are included in an additional instruction leaflet.
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing compound if the tyre has been damaged by driving the car after the tyre has lost its air.
Always observe warnings and follow instructions concerning compressor and sealing compound carefully.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.
Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit- able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive carefully to the next available qualified workshop.
For the sake of the environment Used sealing compound containers should be disposed of at a proper facility.
If and when238
Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible with the sealing compound.
Preparation work
Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away from the flow of traffic as possible.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage the first gear, of put the selector lever to position P.
All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility System General information and safety notes.
Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.
Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a gradient.
Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Tyre repair
The following sections describe the procedures for repairing a tyre.
Using the sealing compound
The instructions on the container give detailed information on how to use the sealing compound.
Inflating the tyre.
Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.
Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.
Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt socket.
Turn on compressor and monitor the pressure shown on the pres- sure gauge.
Completing the repair
Remove the compressor hose from the valve.
Fit the valve cap.
Unplug the compressor from the socket.
Return all tools to their proper storing location.
If and when 239
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6 minutes.
Fuses
Changing a fuse
If a fuse has blown it must be replaced
Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel
Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
Identify the fuse for the failed component page 241.
Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip) with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
Fuse cover in engine compartment
Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
Prise off the fuse cover in the engine compartment by pressing the tabs towards the centre of the cover fig. 176.
Identify the fuse for the failed component page 241.
Fig. 175 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover
Fig. 176 Fuse box cover in engine compartment
If and when240
Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end of the dash panel), fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip) with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter the fuse box.
The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand side of the engine compartment.
The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat- ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen windows) has been corrected.
Colour coding of fuses
WARNING
Never repair damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical system must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
If you replace a fuse with a stronger fuse, you could cause damage to another location in the electrical system.
Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from SEAT dealers.
Colour Amperes
light brown 5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
natural (white) 25
green 30
orange 40
red 50
white 80
blue 100
grey 150
violet 200
Colour Amperes
If and when 241
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
1 Vacant
2 Vacant
3 Vacant
4 Vacant
5 Vacant
6 Vacant
7 Vacant
8 Vacant
9 Airbag 5
10 Vacant
11 Vacant
11 After-sales kit 5
12 Left hand side xenon headlight 10
13 Heating controls/ESP switch, ASR/Reverse gear/Telephone installation 5
14 ABS Control unit/ESP/ Engine/ Headlights/ Trailer control unit/lights switch/ Instrument panel 10
15 Headlight adjustment control unit/ Heated windscreens/ Instrument lighting/ Control unit diagnosis 10
16 Right hand side xenon headlight 10
17 Engine D2L (2.0l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI) 10
18 Vacant
19 Vacant
20 Park Pilot (parking aid) / Gear selector lever/ Control unit ESP 10
If and when242
21 Cable control unit 7,5
22 Volumetric alarm sensor/ Alarm horn 5
23 Diagnosis/ Rain sensor/ Lights switch 10
24 Vacant
25 Automatic gearbox control unit interface 20
26 Vacuum pump 20
27 Vacant
28 Windscreen washer motor/ Cable control unit 20
29 Vacant
30 Cigarette lighter / socket 20
31 Vacant
32 Vacant
33 Heater 40
34 Vacant
35 Vacant
36 2.0 l 147 kW engine 10
37 2.0 l 147 kW engine 10
38 2.0 l 147 kW engine 10
39 Trailer control unit (coupling) 15
40 Trailer control unit (indicators, brakes and left side) 20
41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reversing light and right side) 20
42 Towing ring kit (assistance solution) 15
43 Vacant
44 Rear window heater 25
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
If and when 243
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject to alterations. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to the sticker on the inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your model.
45 Front electric windows 30
46 Rear electric windows 30
47 Engine (gauge, fuel relay) 15
48 Convenience controls 20
49 Heating controls 40
50 Heated seats 30
51 Sunroof 20
52 Headlight washer system 20
53 Towing ring kit (assistance solution) 20
54 Taxi (metre power supply) 5
55 Towing ring kit (assistance solution) 20
56 Taxi (radio transmitter power supply) 15
57 Vacant
58 Central locking control unit 30
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
If and when244
Fuses layout, engine compartment, left part
Fuses
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
1 Vacant
2 Vacant
3 Vacant
4 Vacant
5 Vacant
6 Vacant
7 Vacant
8 Vacant
9 Airbag 5
10 Vacant
11 Vacant
11 Assistance case/ After sales kit / Fitting subsequent devices 5
12 Left hand side xenon headlight 10
13 Heating controls/ ESP switch, ASR/Reverse gear/Telephone installation 5
14 ABS Control unit/ESP/ Engine/ Headlights/ Trailer control unit/lights switch/ Instrument panel 10
15 Headlight adjustment control unit/ Heated windscreens/ Instrument lighting/ Control unit diagnosis 10
16 Right hand side xenon headlight 10
17 Engine D2L (2.0l 147 kW 4 speed TFSI) 10
18 Vacant
19 Vacant
20 Park Pilot (parking aid) / Gear selector lever/ Control unit ESP 10
If and when 245
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
21 Cable control unit 7,5
22 Volumetric alarm sensor/ Alarm horn 5
23 Diagnosis/ Rain sensor/ Lights switch 10
24 Vacant
25 Automatic gearbox control unit interface 20
26 Vacuum pump 20
27 Vacant
28 Windscreen washer motor/ Cable control unit 20
29 Vacant
30 Cigarette lighter / socket 20
31 Vacant
32 Vacant
33 Heater 40
34 Vacant
35 Vacant
36 2.0 l 147 kW engine 10
37 2.0 l 147 kW engine 10
38 2.0 l 147 kW engine 10
39 Trailer control unit (coupling) 15
40 Trailer control unit (indicators, brakes and left side) 20
41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reversing light and right side) 20
42 Towing ring kit (assistance solution) 15
43 Vacant
44 Rear window heater 25
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
If and when246
Position in the engine compartment: Side box
Fuses
45 Front electric windows 30
46 Rear electric windows 30
47 Engine (gauge, fuel relay) 15
48 Convenience controls 20
49 Heating controls 40
50 Heated seats 30
51 Sunroof 20
52 Headlight washer system 20
53 Towing ring kit (assistance solution) 20
54 Taxi (metre power supply) 5
55 Towing ring kit (assistance solution) 20
56 Taxi (radio transmitter power supply) 15
57 Vacant
58 Central locking control unit 30
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
B1 Alternator < 140 W 150
Alternator > 140 W 200
C1 Power steering 80
D1 Multi-terminal voltage supply 30. Internal fuse box 100
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
If and when 247
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject to alterations.
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb first turn off the equipment concerned.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a reduction in the bulb life and condensation on the mirror surface, thus reducing efficiency.
A bulb should only be replaced by one of the same type. The type is inscribed on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base.
It is highly recommended to keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the very least, the bulbs that most affect road safety should have spares in the vehicle.
Main headlights
Dipped beam - H7
Main beam - H1
Position - W5W
Turn signals - PY21W
Xenon headlights21)
Dipped and full beam - D1S22)
Warning lights and additional full beam - H1
Position W5W
Turn signals PY21W
Fog lights
Fog lights - H3
Upper rear light
Stop/Position - P21W23)
Turn signals - R10W
Lower rear light
Fog light - P21W
Reverse light - P21W
E1 Ventilator > 500 W / Ventilator < 500 W 80/50
F1 PTCs (Supplementary electrical heating using air) 100
G1 Trailer fuse voltage supply in internal fuse box 50
H1 Central locking control unit (4F8 with autolock)
Number Electrical equipment Amperes
21) On this type of headlight, the bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made on the automatic control system incorporated.
22) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5 times more than that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum- stances, there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
23) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it will not work in either position or Stop position
If and when248
Indicator
Indicator - W5W
Registration plate light
Registration plate light - C5W
Note Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, any replacement work should be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of how to change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.
Main headlight lamps
Turn signals
Dipped headlights
Main beam headlights
Side lights
Turn signal lamps
Raise the bonnet.
Rotate the lamp holder fig. 178 to the left and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at the same time to the left.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 177 Main headlight lamps
AA
AB
AC
AD
Fig. 178 Turn signal lamps
AA
If and when 249
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Dipped beam lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the loops fig. 179 in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover.
Remove the connector fig. 180 from the bulb.
Disengage the retainer spring fig. 180 pressing inwards and to the right.
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Fig. 179 Dipped head- lights
Fig. 180 Dipped head- lights
A1
A2
A3
If and when250
Main beam lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the cover fig. 181 by pulling on this.
Remove the connector fig. 182 from the bulb.
Press the spring fig. 182 inwards and to the right.
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly into the cut-out on the reflector.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 181 Main beam headlights
Fig. 182 Main beam headlights
AC
A1
A2
If and when 251
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Side lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the cover fig. 183 by pulling on this.
Extract the lamp holder fig. 184 outwards.
Replace the bulb by pulling this out and inserting the replace- ment.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Rear lights
Side lights
Brake lights
Turn signals
Reversing lights
Rear fog light Fig. 183 Side lights
Fig. 184 Side lights
AD
A1
If and when252
Side lights and brake lights
Open the tailgate.
Remove the bolts fig. 185 .
Remove the cover of the luggage compartment lateral panel.
Unscrew the plastic fitting fig. 186 securing the rear light. Inserting a screwdriver under the plastic fitting may help to loosen it.
Partially remove the rear light from its casing taking care not to pull on the cable.
Remove the lamp holder connector.
Unscrew the bolts page 253, fig. 187 from the lamp holder and pull on this.
Press on the lamp and rotate to the left then fit the replacement.
To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when fitting the lamp holder. The metal contacts of the lamp holder ends should be correctly fitted with respect to the rear light contacts.
Fig. 185 Side lights and brake lights
Fig. 186 Side lights and brake lights
AA
AB
AC
If and when 253
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Turn indicators
Remove the rear light from its casing (see side/brake light).
Unscrew the bolts fig. 187 from the lamp holder and pull on this.
Pull out the lamp holder from the turn signal using a screw driver in the direction of the arrow (see fig. 188)
Fit the replacement lamp by pressing it down and rotating to the left.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 187 Indicator lights
Fig. 188 Indicator lights
AC
If and when254
Reverse light / rear fog light
Insert the star-headed screwdriver in the opening on the lower section of the rear light and unscrew the screw in the direction of the arrow fig. 189.
Remove the rear light from its casing taking care not to pull on the cable.
Rotate the lamp holder to the left, and remove it in the direction of the arrow fig. 190.
Replace the bulb by pressing on it and rotating at the same time to the left.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Side indicators
Press the indicator to the left or to the right to remove the lamp.
Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.
Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
Fig. 189 Rear light fitted on bumper and viewed from below
Fig. 190 Rear light after removal from bumper
Fig. 191 Indicator
If and when 255
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into place.
First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing the tabs page 254, fig. 191, arrow .
Insert the lamp as shown by the arrow page 254, fig. 191.
Luggage compartment lights
Extract the tulip shaped fitting by pressing on the inside edge of this -arrow- using the flat side of a screwdriver fig. 192.
Press the lamp sideways and remove it from the allotment fig. 193.
A1
A2
Fig. 192 Luggage compartment light
Fig. 193 Luggage compartment light
If and when256
Registration light
Remove the tulip-shaped fitting, carefully using the flat side of the screwdriver as a lever inserted in the crack as shown by the arrow fig. 194.
Remove the lamp, moving it in the direction of the arrow and outwards fig. 195.
Fig. 194 Registration plate light
Fig. 195 Registration plate light
If and when 257
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Sunroof light
Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver, as shown in the figure. fig. 197.
Remove the lamp, moving it in the direction of the arrow and outwards fig. 197.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's documentation). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.
Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.
The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicles elec- trical system.
Fig. 196 Removing sunroof light
Fig. 197 Removing sunroof light
If and when258
How to jump start: description
In fig. 198, the flat battery is and the charged battery .
Jump lead terminal connections
Switch off the ignition on both vehicles .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 198 terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to a solid metal component which is bolted on to the engine block, or onto the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery .
5. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the car with the flat battery and wait one or two minutes until the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the headlights (if they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blower and rear window heater in the vehicle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected.
10. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse order to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after about half a minute.
Fig. 198 How to connect the jump leads
AA AB
A+
A+
A-
AX
If and when 259
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 206, Working in the engine compartment.
The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.
Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.
The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.
If and when260
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting is preferable page 257.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
Keep the clutch pressed down.
Switch on the ignition.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Towing eyes
Please observe the following points if you use a tow-rope:
Fig. 199 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye
Fig. 200 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle
If and when 261
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
Drive slowly at first until the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate gradually.
Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto- matic vehicle, accelerate gently.
Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake earlier than you would normally, but with a more gentle pressure on the brake.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
Ensure that the tow-rope remains taut at all times when towing.
Fitting the towing eye
Take the towing ring from the onboard tools.
Pull the lower front cover down and leave the cover hanging on the vehicle.
Remove the cover of the screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the lower slot and lever gently.
Screw the towing eye as shown by arrow anti-clockwise to the limit position in the front page 260, fig. 199 or rear
page 260, fig. 200 threaded hole.
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
A tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow-rope. Both drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexperi- enced drivers should not attempt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over- loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
Put the selector lever into position N.
Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.
Do not tow further than 50 km.
If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels raised.
Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe any regulations to the contrary.
For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be tow-started.
If and when262
If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox, you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the notes on page 260, Tow-starting.
General notes on the technical data 263
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Technical Data
General notes on the technical data
What you should be aware of
General notes
All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data.
All data in these documents are valid for the basic model as offered in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the inspection and maintenance schedule in the vehicles registration documents show which engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different if additional equipment is fitted, for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data
Abbreviation Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power
at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per kilometre.
CO2 Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane number, indication of the ignition quality of the diesel.
RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.
General notes on the technical data264
Vehicle identification data
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left- hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the luggage compartment.
The following information can be found in the vehicle information:
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Vehicle type / engine power / gearbox type
Engine and gearbox code / paint number / interior equipment
Optional extras / PR numbers
This vehicle data are also contained in the Inspection and Maintenance schedule Booklet Inspection and Maintenance schedule.
General notes on the technical data 265
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
How are the figures measured?
Fuel consumption
Fuel consumption and emission values are determined according to Euro- pean Commission Directive 99/100/EC. They take the actual kerb weight (weight class) into consideration. To calculate the consumption rate, two
measuring cycles are carried out on a rolling road test bed. The test criteria are as follows:
Note The fuel consumption and emission values quoted in the tables below are based on an empty basic vehicle without optional extras. The kerb weight of the vehicle may vary depending on the equipment fitted and thus the weight category with a relative increase of consumption and emission of CO2 Your Authorised Service Centre will be able to inform you of the figures which apply to your vehicle.
Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the condi- tion of the vehicle.
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated.
Extra urban cycle In the extra urban cycle the vehicle undergoes frequent acceleration and braking in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined The average overall consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra urban cycle.
CO2 emissions The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emissions.
General notes on the technical data266
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase .
WARNING
Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- dent. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and requirements.
Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain circum- stances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other countries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these data .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
For safety reasons, you should not drive at speeds above 80 km/h when towing a trailer. This also applies to countries where higher speeds are permitted.
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced .
General notes on the technical data 267
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the chapter wheels of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight- ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Correct tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Note We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Technical Data268
Technical Data
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, to do so may cause serious damage to the engine.
Radiator expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the components mentioned above. These operations are described in the
page 206.
Overview
Further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical data are contained as of page 263
Fig. 201 Diagram for the location of the various elements
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Technical Data 269
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Petrol engine 1.4 litre 63 kW (86 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 63 (86)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Compression 10,5 0,3
Fuel Super 95
Maximum speed in km/h 169
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 15
Urban cycle 9,7/ 233 9,9/ 238
Extra urban cycle 5,8/ 139 5,9 /142
Combined 7,3/ 175 7,4/ 178
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1915
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1390/ 1490
Gross axle weight, front in kg 940
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1020
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data270
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.6 litre 75 kW (102 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 690
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.2 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 75 (102)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 148/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1595
Compression 10,5 0,5
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 181
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,9
Technical Data 271
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Urban cycle 10,5/ 252 10,6/ 254
Extra urban cycle 6,1/ 146 6,2 /149
Combined 7,7/ 185 7,8/ 187
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1944
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1419/ 1498
Gross axle weight, front in kg 965
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1010
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Technical Data272
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 3500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1984
Compression 11,5-0,5
Fuel Super Plus unleaded 98 RON or Premium unleaded 95 RONa)
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 206
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,7
Urban cycle 11,3/ 271 11,5/ 276
Extra urban cycle 6,5/ 156 6,7/ 160
Combined 8,2/ 196 8,4/ 201
Technical Data 273
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 hp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1999
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1474/ 1547
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1016
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1015
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 730
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 3500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1984
Compression 11,5-0,5
Fuel Super Plus unleaded 98 RON or Premium unleaded 95 RONa)
a) With a slight power loss
Technical Data274
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 203
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,1
Urban cycle 12,7/ 305 12,9/ 310
Extra urban cycle 6,7/ 161 6,9/ 166
Combined 8,9/ 214 9,1/ 218
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2039
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1514/ 1586
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1050
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1020
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres
Technical Data 275
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 hp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 147 (200)/5100- 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1800-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1984
Compression 10,3-0,5
Fuel Super 98 or even Super 95 a)
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 220
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,7
Urban cycle 11,1/298 11,2/ 300 11,3/303
Extra urban cycle 6,4/ 172 6,5/ 174 6,6/177
Combined 8,1/ 217 8,2/ 220 8,3/222
Technical Data276
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 hp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1960
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1492/1639
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1079
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1001
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 740
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 147 (200)/5100- 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1800-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1984
Compression 10,3-0,5
Fuel Super 98 or even Super 95 a)
a) With a slight power loss
Technical Data 277
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 220
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,7
Urban cycle 11,1/298 11,2/ 300
Extra urban cycle 6,4/ 172 6,4/ 172
Combined 8,0/ 214 8,1/ 217
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2092
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1564/1674
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1109
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1026
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 780
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.3 litres
Technical Data278
Diesel engine 1.9 litre TDI 77 kW (105 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)24)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 77 (105) 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896
Compression 19 0,5
Fuel Min 49 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 183
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,4
Urban cycle 6,9/ 186 7,0/ 189
Extra urban cycle 4,6/ 124 4,7/ 127
Combined 5,4/ 146 5,5/ 149
24) with diesel particulate filter (DPF)
Urban cycle 6,9/ 185 7,0/ 188
Extra urban cycle 4,7/ 126 4,7/ 126
Combined 5,4/ 145 5,5/ 147
Technical Data 279
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2029
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1504/ 1582
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1046
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1017
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4,3
Technical Data280
Diesel engine 2.0 litre 103 kW (140 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)25)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min 49 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 201
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,0
Urban cycle 7,6/ 205 7,7/ 208
Extra urban cycle 4,7/ 127 4,8/ 130
Combined 5,8/ 157 5,9/ 160
25) With diesel particulate filter (DPF)
Urban cycle 7,8/ 211
Extra urban cycle 5,0/ 135
Combined 6,0/ 162
Technical Data 281
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 litre 103 kW (140 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2054
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1529/ 1602
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1075
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1010
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min 49 CZ
Technical Data282
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)26)
Weights
Maximum speed in km/h 201
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,9
Urban cycle 7,5/ 203 7,7/ 208
Extra urban cycle 5,1/ 138 5,3/ 143
Combined 6,0/ 162 6,2/ 168
26) With diesel particulate filter (DPF)
Urban cycle 7,5/ 203 7,7/ 208
Extra urban cycle 5,1/ 138 5,3/ 143
Combined 6,0/ 162 6,2/ 167
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2089
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1564/1637
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1106
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1015
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data 283
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical Data284
Diesel engine 2.0 litre 100 kW (136 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 100 (136)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min 49 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 199
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,1
Urban cycle 7,6/ 205 7,7/ 208
Extra urban cycle 4,7/ 127 4,8/ 130
Combined 5,5/ 157 5,9/ 159
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2054
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1529/ 1602
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1075
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1010
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data 285
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 litre 100 kW (136 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 100 (136)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min 49 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 199
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,0
Technical Data286
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Urban cycle 7,5/ 203 7,7/ 208
Extra urban cycle 5,1 /138 5,3/ 143
Combined 6,0/ 162 6,2/ 168
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2089
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1564/ 1637
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1106
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1015
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical Data 287
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)27)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min 49 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 211
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,6
27) with diesel particulate filter (DPF)
Urban cycle 8,0/ 216
Extra urban cycle 5,2/ 140
Combined 6,2/ 167
Technical Data288
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2054
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1529/ 1615
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1075
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1020
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 760
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical Data 289
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4,458 mm/ 1,768 mm
Height at kerb weight 1,568 mm
Front and rear projection 914 mm/ 966 mm
Wheelbase 2,578 mm
Turning circle 10.7 m
Track widtha)
a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front Rear
1,526 mm 1,515 mm
1,534 mm 1,523 mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 55 litres, reserve 7 litres
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
Index 291
Index
A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Adjusting simple headlights driving on the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 driving on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Air conditioner* 2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Air conditioning system General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Air recirculation mode 2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Airbags Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Alarm system Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Alterations to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Alternator Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror* Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 124 Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 124
Automatic car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 165
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Automatic mode 2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window 123
Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 143
B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Battery Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Belt tension device Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Brake pad wear indicator* Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 181
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Index292
Bulb changes general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Bulb defect warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 160
C Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Car phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Locking system for involuntary unlocking . . 95 Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Central locking button Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Central locking system Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Changing gear See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Changing the lamps Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Changing the main headlight lamps dipped beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Changing the rear lights indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 255 rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 reverse light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 217
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 222
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Child seats ISOFIX and Toptether system . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Cleaning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 190
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cleaning cloth seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cleaning fabric trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cleaning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cleaning steel wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Cleaning wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Climatronic General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Control Light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Controls Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Convenience closing Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Index 293
Convenience opening Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 214 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Coolant level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Coolant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Coolant temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Covering headlights driving on the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 driving on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Cruise control* Turning off the cruise control system . . . . . 175
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Diesel engine Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Diesel engine particle filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Differential lock fault (EDL) warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Disabling front passenger airbag Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disabling the airbag Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 44
Display (without warning or information texts) . 59
Displays in the Multi-function display Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Doors Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Drinks holders at the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 178
Driving Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 188
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Driving programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Driving with respect for the environment . . . . 188
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 113
E EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
EDS Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electric steering system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 161 warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Electronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Electronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 81 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
emergency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Emergency opening Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Emission control system warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Index294
Engine compartment Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 206
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Engine fault Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine management Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Engine oil pressure Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 78
Environmental tip Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 179
Example of menu use Open the configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 67 To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Examples of menu use Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . 182
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
F Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Folding tray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Foot brake Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Front interior light type 1 Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Front interior light type 2 Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Front seat adjustment Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fuel Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fuel level Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fuel Tank Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Fuel tank See Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
G G 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
General overview of the engine compartment 268
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
H Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 170
Hazard warning light activation . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
head restraints Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129 adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 129 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
head restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . 13 In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Index 295
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Heated window 2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Indicator lights indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Information texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel menu Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Instrument panel menus Principal menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ISOFIX and Toptether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
J Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
K Key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
L Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Load compartment See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 145 See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 17
Luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Luggage compartment retaining net . . . . . . . . 137
M Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Main beam headlights Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Manual mode 2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Mileage display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Mirrors Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Multi-purpose* mobile stowage compartment 140 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
N Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
One-touch opening and closing Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Index296
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Overview Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
P Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Trips to foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21
Plastic key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
R Radio frequency remote control
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Radio navigation Steering wheel controls audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rear drink holder* Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Rear fog light Indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Rear window heating Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Remote control key Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Repairs Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reverse gear Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
RME fuel (biodiesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Roll-back function Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Running in Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Running in tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
S Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Safety notes Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . 45 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 130, 131
Index 297
Seat belt position Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sitting position Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 267
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particle fil- ter *
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Spare wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 162 After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 163
Steam cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Steering wheel audio controls audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Steering wheel controls Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 158
Stowage area Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Stowage compartment Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Stowage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 136
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sunroof blind Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Switch Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Switches Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Electrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
T Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tank fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
TCS (Traction control system) Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tire-Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . . 237
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 266
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Traction control system warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Index298
Trailer turn signals Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Trips, checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 116
Two-way radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 230
Tyre monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 237
Tyres and wheels Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 223
U Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Using the Tiptronic gear system . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Vehicle paint Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Vehicle tools Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Volumetric sensor* Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Warning reports Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Warning texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 192
Water warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 216
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 267 Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 266
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted? 13
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21
Why wear seatbelts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Windscreen washer fluid Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Windscreen wiper blades Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Winter driving Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 206
Le but de SEAT S.A. tant le dveloppement constant de tous ses types et modles de vhicules, vous comprendrez que cela peut nous amener tout moment raliser des modifications concernant l'apparence, l'quipement et la technique du vhicule fourni. Par consquent, nul droit ne pourra se fonder sur les donnes, les illustrations et les descriptions contenues dans ce Manuel.
Les textes, les illustrations et les normes contenus dans ce manuel ont t raliss sur la base des informations disponibles au moment de l'impression. Sauf erreur ou omission, l'information rassemble dans le prsent manuel est valable la date de mise sous presse.
SEAT interdit la rimpression, la reproduction et la traduction totale ou partielle sans son autorisation crite.
SEAT se rserve expressment tous les droits conformment la loi sur le "Copyright". Droits aux modifications rservs.
Ce papier est fabriqu avec de la cellulose blanchie sans l'utilisation de chlore.
SEAT S.A. - Rimpression : 15.04.06
Interior Manual ALTEA 02.06 20/4/06 18:05 Pgina 4
Fr an
c s
5P 50
12 00
3A N
( 02
.0 6)
( G
T9 )
auto em
Related manuals for Seat Toledo Edition 02.06 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Toledo Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Toledo Edition 02.06 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Toledo as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Toledo. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Seat Toledo Edition 02.06 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Seat Toledo Edition 02.06 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Seat Toledo Edition 02.06 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Seat Toledo Edition 02.06 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Toledo Edition 02.06 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.